JP2021019776A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To suppress a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a specific performance in a first pattern for at least executing a first specific performance in connection with a first suggestive performance at predetermined timing and executing a second specific performance in connection with a second suggestive performance at timing later than the predetermined timing when the first suggestive performance and the second suggestive performance are under execution at predetermined timing, and in a second pattern for executing the first specific performance in connection with the first suggestive performance at predetermined timing, and for executing a third specific performance in connection with the second suggestive performance at timing later than the predetermined timing, and timing when the third specific performance is executed is later than timing when the second specific performance is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 13-17

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there are known game machines that execute pending changes, pseudo-reams, SP reach developments, etc. by opening the displayed present box (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Further, there is known a gaming machine that displays what suggests the execution of a certain effect as a suggestion image (stock) (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-134097 JP-A-2018-50980

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, although the present box has a plurality of roles (suggestion of execution of pending change, suggestion of execution of pseudo-ream, suggestion of SP reach development, etc.), it has a common display mode. , There were few variations, and the interest was insufficient. In the gaming machine of Patent Document 2, since the effect of the suggestion target and the display mode of the suggestion image have a one-to-one relationship, the effect to be executed later is easily recognized by the suggestion image, which is not sufficiently interesting. there were. In addition, depending on the situation, it is necessary to limit the scenes in which the suggestion image is displayed (when a large number of suggestion target effects are executed, the display of the suggestion image becomes complicated).

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that enhances the interest of gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state,
It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled by a bonus game, etc., and can execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that it is controlled to the advantageous state. Prior to the execution of the effect, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect, and the plurality of types of the specific effect can be executed at a predetermined timing. (For example, the pseudo-continuous notice production shown in FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, etc.)
A second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 13-10).
, The effect of the battle rising shown in FIG. 13-11 and the like), and the third specific effect (for example, the relief effect shown in FIG. 13-12 and the like) that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing.
The plurality of types of the suggestion effect are controlled to be more advantageous than the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card shown in FIG. 13-7 (A)) and the first suggestion effect. The first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card) including the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card shown in FIG. 13-7 (B)) having a high degree of expectation is up to a predetermined timing. When continuously executed, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) can be executed in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card), and the first When the 1 suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing later than the predetermined timing, the second specific effect (for example, the battle is completed) is related to the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card). It is possible to perform production (for example, FIG. 13-7 (C).
), FIGS. 13-9 (G4) to 13-9 (L4), FIGS. 13-11 (B3) to 13-11 (.
G3), Fig. 13-14, Fig. 13-15, Fig. 13-16, Fig. 13-17, Fig. 13-22, etc.)
, When the second suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card) is continuously executed until a predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card)
When the first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc.) can be executed and the second suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing,
The third specific effect (for example, a relief effect) can be executed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) (for example, FIG. 13-7 (C), FIG. 13-9). (
G5) to 13-9 (L5), 13-12 (B2) to 13-12 (G2), 13-
13, FIG. 13-15, FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-17, FIG. 13-22, etc., the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at a predetermined timing.
For example, when a cancel card effect is being executed, at least at a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-ream) is related to the first suggestion effect (for example, an up card effect). Along with executing the advance notice effect, etc., the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing the battle) is performed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) at a timing after the predetermined timing. When the up card is determined by targeting the pseudo-continuous production and the cancel card is determined by targeting the battle completion in the first pattern to be executed (for example, in the battle production pattern including the pseudo-continuous production and the battle completion (Fig. 13-14, FIG. The first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in relation to the pattern (see FIG. 13-16) and the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at a predetermined timing. At the same time, at a timing after the predetermined timing, the third suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) is related to the third effect.
In the second pattern (for example, pseudo-ream effect, battle effect pattern including rescue effect) for executing a specific effect (for example, relief effect), an up card is determined by targeting the pseudo-ream effect, and a cancel card is used as the target of the relief effect. (Figs. 13-13, 13-16, etc.), the specific effect can be executed, and the first specific effect (the first specific effect) can be executed.
For example, when executing a pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc., the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect). , The effect of the cancel card, etc.) is different from the ratio of executing the first specific effect (FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16).

According to such a configuration, the first specific effect can be executed in connection with the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect according to the psychology of the player.

(2) The game machine according to (1) is the first suggestion effect (for example, an up-card effect).
When the first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice effect, etc.) is executed in relation to the above, and the second
The first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice) is different from the case where the first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in connection with the suggestive effect (for example, effect by a cancel card). It may execute (directing, etc.) (Fig. 13-9).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the type of suggestive effect when the first specific effect is executed.

(3) In the game machines of (1) and (2) above, the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) are executed at a predetermined timing. The second suggestion effect (for example, when it is done) and at a predetermined timing.
The ratio of whether the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) is continuously executed until the timing after the predetermined timing is different between the case where only the effect by the cancel card is executed and the case where only the effect by the cancel card is executed. (FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16). For example, before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the up card and the cancel card are stocked, and when only the cancel card is stocked, the cancel card is stocked after the pseudo-ream effect ends. The ratios shown are not the same (Figs. 13-13 to 13-16).
The decision ratios are not intentionally the same). Alternatively, the up card is difficult to determine as the target for the battle, and the cancel card is difficult to determine as the target for the pseudo-ream effect. Therefore, if the up card and the cancel card are stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect. There is a high possibility that the up card is the target of the pseudo-continuous production, and there is a high possibility that the cancellation card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-continuous production. On the other hand, if only the cancel card is stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream effect occurs more frequently than the battle starts (because the pseudo-ream effect is also executed in the normal reach), so it is canceled. It is relatively likely that the card is the target of the pseudo-ream effect, and it is not likely that the cancel card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-ream effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the first suggestion effect is executed.

(4) In the game machines (1) to (3) above, the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect, etc.)
Is executed at a timing after the timing at which the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) is executed (FIG. 13-17, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(5) The gaming machines of the above (1) to (4) have a notification effect (for example, an activation effect shown in FIGS. 13-17) for notifying that the specific effect is executed in connection with the suggestion effect. Is feasible (eg, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (H) -13-24 (F), in connection with the upcard being stocked (ie, the stocked upcard is in stock). It is possible to display an invocation image 011SHHD1 notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect is being performed (in connection with its use), as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (C) to 13-25 (H). , It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD2 notifying that the battle is completed in connection with the stock of the cancel card (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancel card). Further, FIGS. 13-28 (A) to 13-23 (G).
), An activation image that notifies that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in connection with the stock of upcards (that is, in connection with the use of the stocked upcards). 011SHHD1 can be displayed. Further, FIGS. 13-31 (F) to 13
As shown in −32 (E), it is notified that the relief effect is executed in connection with the stock of the cancellation card (that is, in relation to the use of the stock cancellation card). The activation image 011SHHD2 can be displayed), and the notification effect can be executed even when the suggestion effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 13-30 (for example, FIG. 13-30).
B) -As shown in FIGS. 13-30 (G), the activation image 011SHH even when the upcard is not stocked (that is, when the upcard is used as an emergency activation).
(D1 can be displayed), if the notification effect is executed when the suggestion effect is not executed, the specific effect equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value is executed. In addition, for example, FIG. 13-15
In the example shown in, the decision rate of targeting the pseudo-continuous production without stocking the upcard is 12% for normal reach (missing) and 15% for normal reach (big hit), and the upcard is stocked. The percentage of decisions to target the pseudo-continuous production is 73% (26% + 47%) for normal reach (missing) and 7 for normal reach (big hit).
It is 0% (25% + 45%). Therefore, the reliability of the pseudo-ream effect when an unstocked upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed is the pseudo-ream when the non-stock upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Higher than the reliability of the production. In other words, when a non-stocked up card is used and a pseudo-ream effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-ream effect is a predetermined value expected value (a pseudo-ream effect using a stocked up card). The reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-continuous production when is executed) or more.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

(6) In the gaming machines of (1) to (5) above, the suggestion effect can be started at a plurality of types of timings, and is executed at any timing according to the type of the suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the rate of determining the timing of display (stock) differs depending on the type of card.
Depending on the type of card, the rate of determination of when to use (that is, the target) will differ).

According to such a configuration, since the suggestion effect is executed at various timings during the game, it is possible to give a sense of expectation at various timings.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example and setting example about a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the hit probability of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 027SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of each notice production. This is an example of each notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is a display example of each item image. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the item image production. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting value suggestion in the game machine which concerns on the feature part 027SH. It is explanatory drawing explaining the advance notice production. This is an example of a notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice production. This is a display example of a present box image or the like. This is a display example of a present box image or the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate of whether or not the present box is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect). It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination rate of whether or not the heat character effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing A which decides about the advance notice production and the present box production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process B for determining a setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect). It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 006SH. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern of the game machine which concerns on a feature part 011SH. This is an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous notice production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the battle production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the battle production. This is an example of each scene of the battle production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the decision ratio of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing explaining the item image production. This is an example of a production operation related to a pseudo-continuous notice production. This is an example of a production operation related to a pseudo-continuous notice production. This is an example of a production operation related to the title display of a battle production. This is an example of a production operation related to the title display of a battle production. This is an example of a production operation related to a relief production. This is an example of the determination rate of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items that target relief. This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items that target the start of battle. This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting pseudo-ren. This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence, type, and acquisition timing of items targeting pseudo-ren. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. It is explanatory drawing explaining various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. This is a specific example of various timings. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing which decides about a pseudo-ream, a battle production pattern, and an item. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing which decides about a pseudo-ream, a battle production pattern, and an item. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH. It is a figure which shows the production operation example which concerns on the feature part 011SH.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game,
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". The special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, there is a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and a hold display.
A display area for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example,
It is equipped with an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is close to the winning ball device 6A. The game ball is closed so that it does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 is, for example, a 7-segment LED.
It may be configured using a display device. Display monitor 29 and display selector switch 30
Is arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the first prize opening and the second prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. Of the total number of prize balls, the number of prize balls by winning the second starting prize opening (Denchu) and the number of prize balls by winning the first and second major winning openings (attackers) occupy. It is a ratio. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the display monitor 29 is set to the pachinko machine 1
It is possible to display the set value in. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 are used when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed.
It is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. The security cover 500A includes a board case 201 including a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed.
The right side of the is covered from the back side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal symbol lost".
Will be. When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7") is used as a confirmed special symbol.
, The actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state is a combination of the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an open upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, how to open the big prize opening (
Multiple types of game states (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) after the big hit game state (number of rounds and open upper limit period) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (
High open control, high base control) is also executed. The time saving state is a special symbol (especially the second special symbol)
This is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the above is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is a low accuracy high base state,
The probability variation state is also called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is also called the low probability low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. In addition, it should be noted
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. The lighting may be turned off, the movable body 32 may be operated, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example,"
The same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", the fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,""is a predetermined small hit combination as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C,
The decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective line in 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The advance notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a lookahead advance notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous notice effect may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied by a power supply board 17 to electric components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 converts, for example, alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC).
), A power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, DC 12V, DC 5V, etc.), and the like.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal to be used, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball has passed or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is
It is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and is a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, and a system reset IC.
It suffices if it can be output using any of the above. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 is a glass door frame 3a.
Detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of the winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G).
It is equipped with an enerator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5.
To display. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal that specifies how to turn on / off the lamp)
Is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S)
After executing 6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started.
The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, it is possible to confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the display of the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started.
The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the game hall or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is finished, the effect control board 1 starts from the main board 11.
A setting change end command is sent to 2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, it is the same as when the setting is confirmed.
The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be stopped. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example
A predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
Set the CTC register built into (step S9) and allow interrupts (step S9).
Step S10). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 10
First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the detection signal from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is transmitted via the switch circuit 110. Determining the presence / absence of reception (step S2
1). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22).
). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). CPU1
By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, 03 manages the execution and hold of the special symbol game, controls the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controls the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26).
). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process processing, CPU103
First, the start winning determination process is executed (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold storages, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the lookahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 uses the RAM 102.
One of the processes of steps S110 to S120 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in. Each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to 10)
In S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is made.

In the special symbol normal processing in step S110, the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value).
Is executed when. In this special symbol normal processing, the first is based on the presence or absence of pending information.
Whether or not to start the special figure game or the second special figure game is determined. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the display result is "big hit" or "small hit".
It includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of a plurality of types by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the result of pre-determining whether or not to do so. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process of making settings for And the display result is "big hit"
If, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is "8".
If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "5".
On the other hand, when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after opening the jackpot ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is "
It is updated to 0 ”and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. here,
When the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. ..
If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value.
While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. In FIG. 7 (A), the fluctuation special chart is the first.
FIG. 7 (B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used in the case of the special figure.
) Indicates a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the variable special figure is the second special figure. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. Random value M
R1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed in the special figure of "big hit" than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value different from the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In the case, 1238 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value
The numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2
In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, 32767 to 3309 of the hit determination values are the same as when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state.
The range up to 4 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, 32767 to 3342 of the hit determination values are the same as when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state.
The range up to 1 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the base is high (high base).
It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the game ball is controlled to a big hit game state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the time saving control). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes.
Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the CTC register setting, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of 1 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. It is said. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. In addition, the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the lookahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the lookahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, the RAM 12
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 2, the following steps S170 to S1
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in is started, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
During variable display of decorative symbols, such as outputting voice or sound effect from R, and turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Execute various production controls. After performing such production control
For example, in response to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the command for specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol is received from the main board 11, etc. The final decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".
During variable display, the effect processing ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. A certain "5"
Update to and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state are executed based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to ", and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
However, the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular Bonus, RT, AT, A
The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of RT and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression ("high", "high", "high" of the comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production.
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of the feature part related to the setting suggestion effect)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In this feature unit, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined ratio during execution of the variable display.

FIG. 10-1 shows step S17 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process executed in 1. In the variable display start setting process,
The stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step S202). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S203). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step S202. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be.

When the effect control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. Set the value (step S
204). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. Image display device 5
"Left", "Middle", and "Right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the screen of
You can start the change of the decorative pattern at.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and other hold numbers "2" to "4"
The hold display in the display part corresponding to the above is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of reserved memories is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S207), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of big hit is "left", "middle", "right"
It is determined that the same (matching) decorative symbols are used in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit.

At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach pattern is
If it is possible to determine one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol. Good. The numerical data indicating the random value for determining the reach symbol is RA.
It may be possible to update using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in M122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is "miss" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 are the highest. As a result, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, the number 6 As the number becomes, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes higher, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and 6 As the number becomes the number of, 5 number, 4 number, 3 number, and 2 number, the variable display result when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is low. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest. In the reach symbol determination table, the variable display result is "missing".
The number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols may be the same regardless of whether the symbols are "big hits" or "big hits". The number of determined judgment values assigned to each decorative symbol as a reach symbol may be different, or the number of assigned determination values may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol to be a reach symbol. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step S225).
). The setting suggestion effect is R based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect.
The presence or absence of execution may be determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the OM 121 and prepared. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. As for the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect, either "without effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.
It is decided to be either.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is determined (step S226). "No effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect
(Step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, after determining the setting suggestion pattern (step S228),
The stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. Numerical data indicating the random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern is RAM.
It suffices if it can be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, R
In the OM 121, the table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 is stored in advance as the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table TA01 or the like. In the decision table TA01, whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit"
The number of judgment values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether or not.
For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination rate of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is "miss". In such a setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. In the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit"
Regardless of whether or not, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect may be the same.

FIG. 10-4 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance the table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4 (B) as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11 or the like. In the determination table TA11, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and 7 It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

The setting suggestion effect can be executed so that the effect mode differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1, so that the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-3, so that the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, these. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all, may be changed. For the setting suggestion effect and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1, arbitrary data related to the effect control, arbitrary data not related to the effect control, or data combining these are predetermined for executing the effect. It may be feasible if it satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions. The effect of changing the pattern display color is also called a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-
No. 3 may be determined at a predetermined ratio only when the variable display result is "big hit", and may not be determined when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 shows step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process executed in. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, the image display device 5
Displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the above, outputting a predetermined sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, turning off, and blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED.
It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating a movable member for effect such as the movable body 32, or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step S242).
.. In the case of the advance notice effect period (step S242; Yes), the control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step S243). When it is not the notice production period (step S242; N
o) After the control in step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step S244). In the case of the reach production period (step S244; Yes),
Control is performed to execute the reach effect (step S245). When the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed by the control of step S245 and then the reach effect after the symbol display color is changed is executed, a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. Can make suggestions regarding set values.

When it is not the reach effect period (step S244; No), or after the control of step S245 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step S246). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. In the case of the change effect period (step S246; Yes), the control to execute the change effect is performed (step S247). When it is not the change effect period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, for example, based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern, the decorative pattern is variable. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

The change effect period may be set to a different time length depending on the effect mode of the change effect. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period longer than the first period, and the pattern R
In the case of E-2, the change effect period is set to the third period, which is longer than the second period, and the pattern RE
In the case of -3, the change effect period may be set to the longest fourth period. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). Networking Servic
There is a tendency to post on websites that require membership registration such as e) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, production that is often performed even when it is disadvantageous (
Regarding (unfavorable production), since it does not motivate the photographer, if the execution period of the disadvantageous production is long,
On the contrary, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the execution period of the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of the unfavorable effect is shorter than that of the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. As a result, when an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it, and it is possible to secure a shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

When the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the effect processing during variable display ends and waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S250). continue,
A predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). In addition, the value of the production process flag is the value corresponding to the waiting process for the special figure.
After updating to 3 ”(step S252), the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 10-6 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. "
By stopping and displaying the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of "left" and "right", the reach is established and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. Figure 10-
6 (B) shows a production execution example HD102, which is a reach development in which the reach production of the normal reach shifts to the reach production of the super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect that is a setting suggestion effect is executed. The effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed. In addition, by displaying an effect image for notifying a message such as "change the symbol display color !!", it is suggested to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows an effect execution example H in which the symbol display color does not change due to the pattern RE-0.
Shows D111. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the pattern display color is changed to copper color by the pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows the pattern RE.
An effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to -2 is shown. Figure 10-6
(D4) is an effect execution example HD113 in which the pattern display color is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3.
Is shown. In the effect execution example HD111, the display color of the reach pattern is not changed by the pattern RE-0, and is not changed as the normal display color of red. In this way, the failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper by the pattern RE-1, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. In the effect execution example HD113, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver by the pattern RE-2, which suggests that the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Production execution example HD1
In No. 14, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold by the pattern RE-3, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect suggests the jackpot expectation by any effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. May be able to make suggestions about. During the execution of the variable display, it may be possible to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. When executing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed and pachinko. It may include the case of giving a suggestion regarding the set value of the game machine 1. When performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is related. It may include the case of making a suggestion.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the suggestion of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns in which the determination ratios differ depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

While the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) or the big hit medium effect (big hit)
Along with the execution of the first round, the effect corresponding to the second round, etc.), the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state for the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion about a probability change state controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

(Explanation of feature section 027SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 027SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect execution means is various effects (for example, various notice effects, item image effects, etc., which will be described later).
Is feasible.

FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has a general winning opening 10 arranged in the left gaming area of the gaming board 2, and a passing gate 41 in the right gaming area.
A variable winning ball device 6B, a general winning opening 10, and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. Also,
A winning ball device 6A is arranged below the image display device 5. Further, a plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area is a variable winning ball. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH is provided with a movable body 027SH 32, which is an accessory, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Feature 02
Since the other configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to 7SH in the gaming board 2 are the same as the configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the gaming board 2 shown in FIG. 1, illustration and description will be omitted. For example, in FIG. 11-1, the first hold indicator 25A and the like are omitted.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the hit probability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. Specifically, FIG. 11-2 (A) shows the set value when the gaming state is the low probability state (
Set values "1" to "6") Show different jackpot probabilities and small hit probabilities. FIG. 11-2 (B) shows the jackpot probability and the small hit probability for each set value (set values “1” to “6”) when the gaming state is in the highly accurate state. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has different gaming states (whether it is in a low probability state or a high probability state) and different set values (set values "1" to "6").
(Apart from), there are multiple types of display result judgment tables for special figures (in each case, Fig. 11-).
2 (12 types of display result judgment tables for special figures) to which the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value are assigned so as to have the big hit probability and the small hit probability as shown in (A) and (B) are stored. Every time, for example, in the winning random number value determination process, the CPU 103 uses one of the above-mentioned plurality of types of special figure display result determination tables to be a big hit or a small hit. It suffices to judge whether it is a hit or a hit (a miss).

FIG. 11-2 (C) shows the types of jackpots. FIG. 11-2 (D) shows the distribution of jackpots for the first special symbol. FIG. 11-2 (E) shows the distribution of jackpots for the second special symbol. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a plurality of types of jackpot type determination tables (each of which corresponds to each of the special symbols (whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol)). , The judgment value corresponding to the first big hit, the judgment value corresponding to the second big hit, and the judgment value corresponding to the third big hit are assigned so as to be sorted as shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and 11-2 (E). Two types of jackpot type determination tables) are stored, and for example, when the CPU 103 determines in the prize-winning random number value determination process that a jackpot will be achieved based on the special figure display result determination table, the above-mentioned plurality of The type of jackpot (big hit type) may be determined by using one of the jackpot type determination tables corresponding to the type.

FIG. 11-3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH. FIG. 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. Fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach A and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach B and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 11-3 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. The expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach. The jackpot expectation of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × (probability that it becomes a big hit) / {(probability that effect a is executed when it becomes a big hit) × ( Probability of becoming a big hit) + (
It is calculated by (probability that the effect a is executed when the big hit does not occur) x (probability that the big hit does not occur)} (when the big hit expectation becomes "1", it always becomes "big hit").

For example, the reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/320) / when the set value is 1.
{(0.3 × 1/320) + (0.009 × 319/320)} = about 9.5%. The reliability of Super Reach A is (0.3 × 1/295) / {(0) when the set value is 6.
.. 3 × 1/295) + (0.009 × 294/295)} = about 10.2%.

Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/320) / {when the set value is 1.
(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)} = about 65.3%. Further, the reliability of Super Reach B is (0.6 × 1/295) / {(0) when the set value is 6.
.. 6 × 1/295) + (0.001 × 294/295)} = about 67.1%.

According to the example of FIG. 11-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but for example, the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to the number of reserved memories. It may be. Further, according to the example of FIG. 11-3 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 1 during the high base
Although 0 is not determined, the fluctuation pattern # 10 may be determined even during a high base, for example, depending on the number of reserved memories.

FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the advance notice effect. 11-5 and 11-6 are production examples of the respective notice effects. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIG.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in -4. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1”. , Weak cut-in image 027S
Display HYKE-JCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) as a notice effect (cut-in notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2”. , Strong cut-in image 027S
Display HYKE-KCI.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-B" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a group notice effect (display of a group image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a notice production pattern "
As a notice effect (group notice effect) of "YEP-B", for example, a group image 027SHYKE-GN as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C) is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a weak cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C1”. Such as the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI are displayed. The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" shown in FIG. 11-4 is a button notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C) and 11-6 (D), for example, as a notice effect (button notice effect / display of a strong cut-in image) of the notice effect pattern “YEP-C2”. Such, the button image 027SHYKE-BU and the strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI are displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in Fig. 11-4 is the character advance notice effect (
The movement of the accessory). The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH has a notice production pattern "
As a preview effect (movement of the accessory) of "YEP-D", for example, FIGS. 11-6 (E) (F) (G)
As shown in, the movable body 027SH32 is operated.

FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like. FIG. 11-7 (A
) Is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), when the super reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is either # 13 or # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and the super reach jackpot is determined. (Fluctuation patterns # 17, # 1)
In the case of any of 8), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, feature unit 027
The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to SH has a cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach loss, which allocates 40% of the total as a judgment value corresponding to execution existence, and 5 of the total.
The cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for the super reach jackpot, in which 0% is assigned as the determination value corresponding to the execution presence, is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be out of the super reach. Use the cut-in notice effect execution / non-execution decision table for super reach loss to determine whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, use the cut-in notice effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach jackpot. You may decide whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect. Other notice production (group notice production,
The same applies to the determination of whether or not to execute the button notice effect and the character advance notice effect). If the super reach does not occur (if any of the fluctuation patterns # 10, # 11, # 12, # 15, and # 16), the execution status is determined at a rate of 0% (determine not to execute). ).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect pattern (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A” related to the cut-in notice effect).
2 ”) is decided. FIG. 11-7 (B) shows the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1” and “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect.
) Is an example of the determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), when the super reach is lost, the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is 20. Determined at a rate of%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 80%. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH, 80% of the whole is allocated as a determination value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 20% of the whole corresponds to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2". The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach loss assigned as the judgment value, 20% of the whole is assigned as the judgment value corresponding to the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1", and 80% of the whole is the notice effect pattern " The cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot, which is assigned as the determination value corresponding to "YEP-A2", is stored. For example, the effect control CPU 120 super reach when the super reach is lost. Use the cut-in notice effect pattern determination table for out-of-order to determine the advance notice effect pattern for the cut-in advance notice effect, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, cut in using the cut-in advance notice effect pattern determination table for the super reach jackpot. The notice production pattern of the notice effect may be determined. The same applies to the determination of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects (button advance notice effects).

FIG. 11-7 (C) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (C), if the super reach is out of order, the execution is 2
It is decided at a rate of 0%, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, it is decided at a rate of 50%. In addition, there is one type of notice production pattern related to the group notice production (notice production pattern "YEP-".
B ") Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the group notice effect, the notice effect pattern" YEP- "as the notice effect pattern related to the group notice effect.
B ”is determined. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

FIG. 11-7 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), when the super reach is out of order, the execution rate is determined at a rate of 10%, and when the super reach jackpot is achieved, the execution rate is 50.
Determined at a rate of%. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the button notice effect, it determines the notice effect pattern (“YEP-C1”, “YEP-C2”) related to the button notice effect. FIG. 11-7 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect. According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (E), when the super reach is out of order, the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the notice effect pattern "Y" is determined.
"EP-C2" is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, in the case of a super reach jackpot,
The notice production pattern "YEP-C1" is determined at a rate of 10%, and the notice production pattern "YEP"
-C2 "is determined at a rate of 90%.

FIG. 11-7 (F) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). According to the example shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), if the super reach is out of order, the execution is 5
It is decided at a rate of%, and if it becomes a super reach jackpot, it is decided at a rate of 75%. In addition, there is one type of notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-".
Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect, the advance notice effect pattern “YE” is used as the advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect.
"PD" is determined. If it does not reach super reach, it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 0% (it is decided not to execute).

According to FIG. 11-7, in the case of super reach, a maximum of four types of advance notice effects are executed.

In addition, the probability that the cut-in notice effect (display of weak cut-in image or display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is {(probability of loss × super reach at the time of loss). Probability of becoming x Probability of performing a cut-in notice effect when the super reach is off) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach when a big hit x Super reach The cut-in notice effect is executed when a big hit Probability)} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)} When the set value is 1, { (319/32
0 x 1% x 40%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319/320 x 1%)
+ (1/320 x 90%)} = about 42%.

In addition, the probability that the group notice effect (display of the group image) will be executed when it becomes super reach is
{(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing group notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super Probability that group notice production will be executed at the time of reach jackpot)} /
Calculated from {(probability of losing x probability of becoming super reach when losing) + (probability of becoming a big hit x probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit)}, if the set value is 1, {
(319/320 x 1% x 20%) + (1/320 x 90% x 50%)} / {(319 /
320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 26%.

In addition, the probability that the button notice effect (display of button image->press-> display of weak cut-in image or display of button image->press-> display of strong cut-in image) will be executed at the time of super reach is { (Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing button notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Super reach Probability that the button notice effect will be executed at the time of a big hit)} / {(Probability of becoming a miss x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming a super reach at the time of a big hit)} Calculated from, in the case of the set value 1, {(319/320 x 1% x 10%) + (1/320 x 90% x 5)
0%)} / {(319/320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 19%.

In addition, the probability that the character advance notice effect (action of the character) will be executed when it becomes super reach is
{(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach when missing x Probability of executing the character advance notice effect when super reach is out) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach when hitting a big hit x Probability that the character notice effect will be executed when the super reach jackpot is hit)
} / {(Probability of losing x Probability of becoming super reach at the time of losing) + (Probability of becoming a big hit x Probability of becoming super reach at the time of a big hit)} When the set value is 1, {(319) / 320 x 1% x 5%) + (1/320 x 90% x 75%)} / {(319)
/ 320 × 1%) + (1/320 × 90%)} = about 20%.

FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the item image effect. FIG. 11-9 is a display example of each item image. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIG. 11-.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of item image effects as shown in 8 (A).

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-A" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an item image suggesting that the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1 or YEP-A2) is executed. It is an item image effect A that displays A. In other words, the item image A displayed in the item image effect A can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the cut-in advance notice effect).

In the item image effect A, depending on the display mode of the item image A (first to third display modes),
The strength (high or low reliability) of the suggestion that the cut-in notice effect will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the first display mode is
It suggests with low reliability whether the cut-in notice effect will be executed. The item image 027SHIGALV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A. In this embodiment, the first display mode (level 1) of the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D) is blue.

The item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the second display mode suggests whether the cut-in notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGALV2 shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image A. In this embodiment, item image A (item image B to item image D).
The second display mode (level 2) of the same applies is green.

The item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the cut-in notice effect is executed. That is, the item image A in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the cut-in notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGALV3 shown in FIG. 11-9 (C) is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image A.
In this embodiment, the item image A (the same applies to the item image B to the item image D).
The third display mode (level 3) of is red.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-B" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an item that displays an item image B suggesting that the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. Image production B. In other words, the item image B displayed in the item image effect B can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the group advance notice effect).

In the item image effect B, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image B,
The strength (high or low reliability) of the suggestion that the group notice production will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the first display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with low reliability. Item image 02 shown in FIG. 11-9 (D)
7SHIGBLV1 is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image B.

The item image B of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the second display mode suggests whether the group notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. Item image 027S shown in FIG. 11-9 (E)
HIGBLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image B.

The item image B of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the group notice effect is executed. That is, the item image B of the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the group notice effect is executed. Item image 027SHIGB shown in FIG. 11-9 (F)
LV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image B.

The item image notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-C" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) suggests that the button advance effect (YEP-C1 or YEP-C2) is executed. Is an item image effect C for displaying. In other words, the item image C displayed in the item image effect C can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the button advance notice effect).

In the item image effect C, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image C,
The strength of the suggestion (high or low reliability) of whether the button notice effect is executed is different.

Specifically, the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C of the first display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with low reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (G) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image C.

The item image C of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the second display mode suggests whether the button notice effect is executed with a moderate degree of reliability. The item image 027SHIGCLV2 shown in FIG. 11-9 (H) is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image C.

The item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the button notice effect is executed. That is, the item image C in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether the button notice effect is executed. Item image 027S shown in FIG. 11-9 (I)
HIGCLV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image C.

The item image advance notice effect of the item image effect pattern "IGEP-D" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an item image D suggesting that the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.
Is an item image effect D for displaying. In other words, the item image D displayed in the item image effect D can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed (specifically, the character advance notice effect).

In the item image effect D, depending on the display mode (first to third display modes) of the item image D,
The strength (high or low reliability) of the suggestion that the character advance notice production will be executed is different.

Specifically, the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is a weak suggestion that weakly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the first display mode suggests with low reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. The item image 027SHIGDLV1 shown in FIG. 11-9 (J) is an example of the first display mode (level 1) of the item image D.

The item image D of the second display mode (level 2) is a medium suggestion that moderately suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the second display mode suggests with a moderate degree of reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. Item image 02 shown in FIG. 11-9 (K)
7SHIGDLV2 is an example of the second display mode (level 2) of the item image D.

The item image D of the third display mode (level 3) is a strong suggestion that strongly suggests that the character advance notice effect is executed. That is, the item image D in the third display mode suggests with high reliability whether or not the character advance notice effect is executed. Item image 027SHI shown in FIG. 11-9 (L)
GDLV3 is an example of the third display mode (level 3) of the item image D.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH has an item image effect A (IGEP-A), an item image effect B (IGEP-B), and an item image effect C (IGEP-B) shown in FIG. 11-8 (A).
For four types of item image effects, IGEP-C) and item image effect D (IGEP-D), one of the four types may not be executed, or only one of the four types may be executed. There are also cases where 2 out of 4 types are executed, and 3 out of 4 types
In some cases, the types are executed, and in other cases, all four types are executed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can change the display mode of the item image to be displayed in the item image production. In other words, feature unit 027S
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to H can execute an item image effect that changes the display mode of the item image. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH may change the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) during the execution of the item image effect A. It is possible. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH can execute the item image effect A that changes the display mode of the item image A from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). is there. Item image production B
The same applies to item image effect C and item image effect D.

FIG. 11-8 (B) shows the contents of the item image effect execution mode pattern. The item image production execution mode pattern is common to each item image production (item image production A, item image production B, item image production C, item image production D), and is any one for each item image production. Item image effect execution mode pattern is determined (details will be described later).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is
This is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not execute the item image effect. Since the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" does not execute the item image effect, the item image is not displayed.

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is
It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that executes the item image effect, and is an item image effect execution mode pattern that does not change the display mode of the item image as the first display mode (level 1).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is
It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that executes the item image effect, and is an item image effect execution mode pattern that changes the display mode of the item image from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2). ..

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is
It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that executes the item image effect, the display mode of the item image is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2), and further, the second display mode (level 2). This is an item image effect execution mode pattern for changing from the level 2) to the third display mode (level 3).

The item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP5” shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is
It is an item image effect execution mode pattern that executes the item image effect, and is an item image effect execution mode pattern that changes the display mode of the item image from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3). ..

Therefore, although the details will be described later, for example, the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined for the item image effect A (IGEP-A), and the item image effect B (I)
For GEP-B), the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" was determined.
About item image production C (IGEP-C) Item image production execution mode pattern "IG
When "EGP2" is determined and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is determined for the item image effect D (IGEP-D), the display mode of the item image A is changed from the first display mode (level 1) to the first. 2 Item image effect A (IGEP-A) that changes to the display mode (level 2), and item image effect C (IGEP-C) that does not change the display mode of item image C as the first display mode (level 1). , Item image effect D (I) that changes the display mode of the item image D from the first display mode (level 1) to the third display mode (level 3).
GEP-D) and will be executed (item image effect B will not be executed).

FIG. 11-10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination ratio of the item image effect and the like. Figure 1
1-10 (A) and FIG. 11-10 (B) are examples of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A). Specifically, FIG. 11-10 (A)
) Is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed in the super reach. FIG. 11-10 (B) shows the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is not executed in the super reach. This is an example.

11-10 (C) and 11-10 (D) show item image effect B (IGEP-B).
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. Specifically, FIG. 11-1
0 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed in the super reach. FIG. 11-10 (D) shows the group notice production (YEP-) in the super reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) when B) is not executed.

11-10 (E) and 11-10 (F) show item image effect C (IGEP-C).
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. Specifically, FIG. 11-1
0 (E) is a button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) in Super Reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) in the case of executing. FIG. 11-10 (F) shows the super reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) when the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is not executed.

11-10 (G) and 11-10 (H) show the item image effect D (IGEP-D).
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern. Specifically, FIG. 11-1
0 (G) is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed in the super reach. FIG. 11-10 (H) shows the character advance notice production (YE) in the super reach.
This is an example of the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) when PD) is not executed.

According to FIG. 11-10, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A that displays the item image A and suggests the execution of the cut-in notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect A is executed or the item The display mode of the item image A when the image effect A is executed) is determined by whether or not the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B that displays the item image B and suggests the execution of the group notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect B is executed or the item image effect B is executed) is executed. The display mode of the item image B in the case) is a group notice effect (YE).
It is determined by whether or not P-B) is executed. In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C that displays the item image C and suggests the execution of the button notice effect (that is,).
Whether the item image effect C is executed or the display mode of the item image C when the item image effect C is executed) is determined by whether or not the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is executed. Further, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D that displays the item image D and suggests the execution of the character advance notice effect (that is, whether the item image effect D is executed or the item image effect D is executed). The display mode of the item image D in this case) is determined by whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

As specific examples, the reliability of the suggestion of the cut-in notice effect for each display mode of the item image A displayed in the item image effect A, and the button notice effect for each display mode of the item image C displayed in the item image effect C. The reliability of the suggestion will be explained.

(Reliability of suggestion of cut-in notice effect for each display mode of item image A)
According to FIGS. 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEG”.
This is the case when "P4" is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 50% (FIG. 11-10 (A)).
When the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is determined at a rate of 10% (FIG. 11-10 (B)). The reliability of the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (when the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the third display mode.
Probability that the item image A in the display mode is finally displayed) × (Probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach) / {When the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the third display mode Probability that item image A is finally displayed) × (Probability that cut-in notice effect is executed in super reach) + (Item image A in the third display mode is displayed when cut-in notice effect is not executed in super reach It is calculated by (probability of being finally displayed) x (probability that the cut-in notice effect is not executed in Super Reach)}. When 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice effect when the final display mode of the item image A is the third display mode in the super reach. The reliability is (50% x 42%)
/ {(50% x 42%) + (10% x 58%)} = about 78%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is performed at a rate of 30%.
(FIG. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 20% (FIG. 11-10).
(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the second display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (30% x 42)
%) / {(30% x 42%) + (20% x 58%)} = about 52%.

The final display mode of the item image A becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” is determined. When executing the cut-in notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is performed at a rate of 20%.
(FIG. 11-10 (A)), and when the cut-in notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 60% (FIG. 11-10).
(B)). Therefore, when 42% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the cut-in notice effect is executed in the super reach, the cut-in notice when the final display mode of the item image A is the first display mode in the super reach. The reliability of the production is (20% x 42)
%) / {(20% x 42%) + (60% x 58%)} = about 19%.

(Reliability of suggestion of button notice effect for each display mode of item image C)
According to FIGS. 11-10 (E) and 11-10 (F), the final display mode of the item image C is the third display mode (level 3), which is the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEG”.
This is the case when "P4" or "IGEGP5" is determined. When executing the button notice effect, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" or "IGE" is performed at a rate of 70% in total.
"GP5" is decided (Fig. 11-10 (E)), and 5% when the button notice effect is not executed.
The item image production execution mode pattern “IGEGP4” is determined at the ratio of
0 (F)). The reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode is, for example, (the item of the third display mode when the button notice effect is executed in the super reach). Probability that image C is finally displayed) × (
Probability that the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) / {Probability that the item image C in the third display mode is finally displayed when the button notice effect is executed in Super Reach) × (Button notice in Super Reach) Probability that the effect is executed) + (Probability that the item image C of the third display mode is finally displayed when the button advance effect is not executed in Super Reach) × (Probability that the button advance effect is not executed in Super Reach) }
Calculated by. When 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the reliability of the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the third display mode. Is (70% x 19%) /
{(70% x 19%) + (5% x 81%)} = about 77%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the second display mode (level 2) when the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP3” is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined at a rate of 15% (FIG. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect is determined at a rate of 10%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is determined (FIG. 11-10 (F)).
.. Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the second display mode. The reliability is (15% x 19%) / {(15%)
× 19%) + (10% × 81%)} = about 26%.

The final display mode of the item image C becomes the first display mode (level 1) when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined. When the button notice effect is executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 10% (FIG. 11-10 (E)), and when the button notice effect is not executed, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined at a rate of 65%. The item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP2" is determined (FIG. 11-10 (F)).
.. Therefore, when 19% of the set value 1 is used as the probability that the button notice effect is executed in the super reach, the button notice effect when the final display mode of the item image C in the super reach is the first display mode. The reliability is (10% x 19%) / {(10%)
× 19%) + (65% × 81%)} = about 3.5%.

11-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 11-1
1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of various item images, the execution timing of various notice effects, and the like in the variable display that becomes super reach.

In FIGS. 11-11, T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T2 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9 (A)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image A is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T2.

T3 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9 (D)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image B is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T3.

T4 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9 (G)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image C is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T4.

T5 is the timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9 (J)) of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is any of "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5", the item image D is displayed in the first display mode (level 1) in the T5.

T6 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9 (B)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP".
In the case of "4", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) in the T6. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
In the T6, the display mode of the item image effect A does not change (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains).

T7 is the timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9 (E)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP".
In the case of "4", the display mode of the item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) in the T7. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
In the T7, the display mode of the item image effect B does not change (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains).

T8 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9 (H)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP".
In the case of "4", the display mode of the item image effect C changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) in the T8. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
In the T8, the display mode of the item image effect C does not change (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains).

T9 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9 (K)) of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP3" or "IGEGP".
In the case of "4", the display mode of the item image effect D changes from the first display mode (level 1) to the second display mode (level 2) in the T9. When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2" or "IGEGP5",
In the T8, the display mode of the item image effect D does not change (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains).

T10 is the timing at which the item image A (see FIG. 11-9 (C)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect A is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4",
In the T10, the display mode of the item image effect A is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third.
When the display mode changes to the display mode (level 3) and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect A changes from the first display mode (level 1) in the T10. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains). In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is ".
In the case of "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect A does not change in the T10 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T11 is a timing at which the item image B (see FIG. 11-9 (F)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect B is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP4",
In the T11, the display mode of the item image effect B is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third.
When the display mode changes to the display mode (level 3) and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect B changes from the first display mode (level 1) in the T11. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains). In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is ".
In the case of "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect B does not change in the T11 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T12 is the timing at which the item image C (see FIG. 11-9 (I)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect C is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP4",
In the T12, the display mode of the item image effect C is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third.
When the display mode is changed to the display mode (level 3) and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect C is changed from the first display mode (level 1) in the T12. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains). In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is ".
In the case of "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect C does not change in the T12 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T13 is a timing at which the item image D (see FIG. 11-9 (L)) of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed when the item image effect D is executed. For example, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP4",
In the T13, the display mode of the item image effect D is from the second display mode (level 2) to the third.
When the display mode is changed to the display mode (level 3) and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP5", the display mode of the item image effect D is changed from the first display mode (level 1) in the T13. It changes to the third display mode (level 3). When the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (first display mode (level 1).
) Remains). In addition, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "
In the case of "IGEGP3", the display mode of the item image effect D does not change in the T13 (the second display mode (level 2) remains).

T14 is the deletion timing (timing used as an item) of the item image A. That is, the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP.
If it is "2", the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and if the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP3", the displayed first item image A is deleted. 2 When the item image A of the display mode (level 2) is erased and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A is "IGEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is displayed. Delete the item image A of.

Further, T14 is also a timing for starting the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T15 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T14 to T15 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T15 is also a timing to start execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2). T16 is a cut-in notice production (YEP-A1, YEP-A2)
It is the timing to end the execution of. That is, T15 to T16 are cut-in notice effects (
This is the execution period of YEP-A1 and YEP-A2).

T17 is the deletion timing of the item image B. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "IGEGP2", the item image B of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect B is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image B of the second display aspect (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B is "I".
In the case of "GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image B of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

In addition, T17 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B). T18 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished.
That is, T17 to T18 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T18 is also a timing to start execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T
19 is the timing at which the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) is finished. That is, T18
~ T19 is the execution period of the group notice production (YEP-B).

T20 is the deletion timing of the item image C. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "IGEGP2", the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect C is executed. When the aspect pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image C of the second display aspect (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C is "I".
In the case of "GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T20 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T21 is the timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T20 to T21 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T21 is also a timing for starting the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2). T22 is a timing at which the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2) is finished. That is, T21 to T22 are button notice effects (YEP-C1).
, YEP-C2) execution period.

T23 is the deletion timing of the item image D. That is, when the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "IGEGP2", the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution of the item image effect D is executed. When the mode pattern is "IGEGP3", the item image D of the second display mode (level 2) being displayed is deleted, and the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D is "I".
In the case of "GEGP4" or "IGEGP5", the item image D of the third display mode (level 3) being displayed is deleted.

Further, T23 is also a timing to start the execution of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T24 is a timing at which the execution of the above-mentioned fanning effect is finished. That is, T23 to T24 are execution periods of the above-mentioned fanning effect.

Further, T24 is also a timing for starting the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).
T25 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T
24 to T25 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).

11-12 and 11-13 are specific examples of various timings. Figure 11-12 (
In A), only the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed as the advance notice effect, and only the item image effect A (IGEP-A) is executed as the item image effect in the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4". (That is, item image production B (IGEP)
-B), item image production C (IGEP-C) and item image production D (IGEP-D)
Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display timing of the item image A, the execution timing of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), and the like in the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”).

In FIG. 11-12 (A), T2 to T6 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T6 to T10 are periods during which the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) is displayed. T10 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. T15 to T16 are cut-in notice production (
The execution period of YEP-A1), that is, the period during which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-5 (A)) is displayed.

In FIG. 11-12 (B), nothing is executed as the advance notice effect, and the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect C (IGEP-C), and the item image effect D (IGEP) are used as the item image effect. -D) each item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP2"
Description for explaining the display timing of the item image A, the item image C, the item image D, etc. in the case of being executed in (when the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1"). It is a figure.

In FIG. 11-12 (B), T2 to T14 are periods during which the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. In addition, the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T4 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. It should be noted that the button notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect. T5-T23
Is the period during which the item image D of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T23 ~
T24 is an execution period of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect. It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 11-13 (A), a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), a group notice effect (YEP-B), and a button notice effect (YEP-C1) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect is an item. Each of the image effect A (IGEP-A) and the item image effect B (IGEP-B) is executed by the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3", and the item image effect C (IGEP-C) is the item image effect execution mode pattern. It is executed by "IGEGP4", and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) is the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG".
Item image A, item image B, item image C, when executed in "P2"
Display timing of item image D, cut-in notice production (YEP-A1), group notice production (
It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing of YEP-B) and the button notice effect (YEP-C1).

In FIG. 11-13 (A), T14 to T15 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect. The item image A is erased in T14, but the display mode of the item image A immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T15 ~ T1
6 is the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), that is, the weak cut-in image 0.
This is the period during which 27SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-5 (A)) is displayed. T17
~ T18 is an execution period of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect. Item image B
Is erased at T17, but the display mode of the item image B immediately before being erased is the second display mode (level 2). T18 to T19 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B), that is, a period during which the group image 027SHYKE-GN (see FIG. 11-5 (C)) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. The item image C is erased at T20, but the display mode of the item image C immediately before being erased is the third display mode (level 3). T21 to T22 are button notice effects (YE)
Execution period of P-C1), that is, button image 027SHYKE-BU (FIG. 11-6 (A).
) Is displayed (Push button 3 while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed.
When 1B is operated, it is a period in which a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (see FIG. 11-6 (B) is displayed) instead of the button image 027SHYKE-BU). T23
~ T24 is an execution period of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect. The item image D is erased in T23, but the display mode of the item image D immediately before being erased is the first display mode (level 1). It should be noted that the character advance notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect.

In FIG. 11-13 (B), the button notice effect (YEP-C2) and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) are executed as the advance notice effects, and the item image effect C (IGE) is executed as the item image effect.
When only PC) is executed in the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" (
That is, the item image effect A (IGEP-A), the item image effect B (IGEP-B), and the item image effect D (IGEP-D) are the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEG."
In the case of "P1"), the display timing of the item image C and the notice production of the character (YEP)
It is explanatory drawing explaining the execution timing and the like of −D).

In FIG. 11-13 (B), T4 to T12 are periods during which the item image C of the first display mode (level 1) is displayed. T12 to T20 are periods during which the item image C of the third display mode (level 3) is displayed. T20 to T21 are execution periods of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button notice effect. T21 to T22 are button notice effects (YEP-C)
The execution period of 2), that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU (see FIG. 11-6 (C)) is displayed (when the push button 31B is operated while the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, the button image 027SHYKE -Strong cut-in image 027 instead of BU
This is the SHYKE-KCI (see FIG. 11-6 (D)) period. T24 ~ T2
Reference numeral 5 denotes an execution period of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), that is, a period during which the movable body 027SH32 is operated (see FIGS. 11-6 (E) to 11-6 (G)). In addition, FIG. 11-13 (
In the example of B), there is neither the display of the item image D suggesting whether the character advance notice effect is executed nor the execution of the fanning effect to incite whether to execute the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). ) Is being executed. Specifically, when the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP1" is determined when the character advance notice effect is executed (see FIG. 11-10 (G)), it is determined whether the character advance notice effect is executed. Neither the display of the suggesting item image D nor the execution of the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect is executed, and the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.

11-14 and 11-15 are S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (the effect determination process which determines a notice effect, an item image effect, etc.) executed in the variable display start setting process of. The flowchart of FIG. 11-15 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 11-14.

In the effect determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS100).
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the effect control CPU 120 has 40% execution.
If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a ratio of 50%, and the fluctuation pattern is other than the above (variation patterns # 10, # 18). If any of 11, # 12, # 15, and # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS101). When it is decided that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; YES),
Step 027 Proceed to SHS102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS105.

Following step 027SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the effect control CP
If the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the U120 has a notice production pattern "YEP".
-A1 "is determined at 80%, and the notice effect pattern" YEP-A2 "is determined at 20%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20%, and sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to 8.
Determined at 0%.

Following step 027SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 027S.
Notice production pattern of cut-in notice production determined by HS102 (Notice production pattern "Y"
Set "EP-A1" or notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") (step 027SH)
S103).

Following step 027SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case of executing the cut-in notice effect (step 027SHS104). For example, FIG.
As shown in −10 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” to 0% and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2” to 2.
0%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 30%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 50%, item image production execution mode pattern "IG"
"EGP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS101 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image effect A (IGEP-A) as a case where the cut-in notice effect is not executed.
The item image effect execution mode pattern) is determined (step 027SHS105). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGE”.
The ratio of "GP2" is 60%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 20%, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 10%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP5" is 0%.

Following step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect A (IGEP-A) determined in step 027SHS104 or step 027SHS105 (step 027SHS106).

Following step 027SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS110). For example, FIG.
As shown in 1-7 (C), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 20% if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and the execution presence is 50 if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. It is determined at a rate of%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; YES), step 027S
Proceed to HS113. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS111; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS115.

Following step 027SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-B" for the group advance notice effect (step 027SHS113).

Following step 027SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case of executing the group notice effect (step 027SHS114). For example, FIG. 11-10 (
As shown in C), the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image effect execution mode pattern “I.
GEGP1 ”is 0%, item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP2 ”is 20%, item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP3 ”is 30%, item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP4 ”is 45%, and item image effect execution mode Pattern "IGEGP5
Is determined at a rate of 5%.

Following step 027SHS111 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) as a case where the group notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS115). ). For example, FIG.
As shown in 1-10 (D), the effect control CPU 120 has 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”.
60%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 20%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 10%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4"
"IGEGP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115, the effect control C
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-B) determined in step 027SHS114 or step 027SHS115 (step 027SHS116).

Following step 027SHS116, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS120). For example
As shown in FIG. 11-7 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution presence at a rate of 10% if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and the execution presence if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Determined at a rate of 50%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execute Yes is 0
Determined at a rate of%.

Following step 027SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the button advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 027SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 027SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS125.

Following step 027SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (E), the effect control CPU 1
20 is a notice production pattern "YEP-C" if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach.
"1" is determined at 90%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at 10%. Also,
If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10%, and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.
To decide with.

Following step 027SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 027S.
Notice production pattern of button notice production determined by HS122 (Notice production pattern "YEP"
-C1 "or the advance notice effect pattern" YEP-C2 ") is set (step 027SHS1).
23).

Following step 027SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case of executing the button notice effect (step 027SHS124). For example, FIG. 11-1
As shown in 0 (E), the effect control CPU 120 has 5% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and 10% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”.
, Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEG"
"P5" is determined at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS121 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) as a case where the button advance notice effect is not executed (step 027SHS125). ). For example
As shown in FIG. 11-10 (F), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1”.
2 ”is 65%, the item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP3 ”is 10%, the item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP4 ”is 5%, and the item image effect execution mode pattern“ IGEGP5 ”is 0%.

Following step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect C (IGEP-C) determined in step 027SHS124 or step 027SHS125 (step 027SHS126).

Following step 027SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 027SHS130). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect is executed if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, and executes if the fluctuation pattern is the super reach jackpot. Yes is determined at a rate of 75%, and if the fluctuation pattern is other than the above, execution Yes is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 027SHS131; YES), step 02
Proceed to 7SHS133. When it is not decided that there is execution for the character advance notice production (step 0)
27SHS131; NO), the process proceeds to step 027SHS135.

Following step 027SHS131, the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 027SHS133).

Following step 027SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 determines an execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case of executing the character advance notice effect (step 027SHS134). For example, FIG. 11-10
As shown in (G), the effect control CPU 120 uses the item image effect execution mode pattern “
10% for "IGEGP1", 5% for the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP2",
Item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" is 15%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" is 60%, item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP"
5 ”is determined at a rate of 10%.

Following step 027SHS131 (NO), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode (item image effect execution mode pattern) of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) as a case where the character advance notice effect is not executed (step). 027SHS135). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has 20% of the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP1” and the item image effect execution mode pattern “IGEGP2”.
74%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP3" 4%, item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP4" 2%, item image production execution mode pattern "I"
"GEGP5" is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135, C for effect control
The PU 120 sets the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect B (IGEP-D) determined in step 027SHS134 or step 027SHS135 (step 027SHS136). Then, this flowchart ends.

11-16 to 11-20 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 11-16 to 11-20 show the example shown in FIG. 11-12 (A).
The main scenes are shown as an example, FIG. 11-16 (A) → FIG. 11-16 (B) →
FIG. 11-16 (C) → FIG. 11-17 (A) → FIG. 11-17 (B) → FIG. 11-17 (C) →
FIG. 11-18 (A) → FIG. 11-18 (B) → FIG. 11-18 (C) → FIG. 11-19 (A) →
FIG. 11-19 (B) → FIG. 11-19 (C) → FIG. 11-20 (A) → FIG. 11-20 (B) →
The transition is made in the order of FIG. 11-20 (C).

FIG. 11-16 (A) is a scene of reaching in the variable display. Figure 11-16 (
B) is a scene developed into super reach (scene of T1 in FIG. 11-11). Figure 11-
16 (C) is the opening scene of the super reach production (the scene immediately after T1 in FIG. 11-11).

11-17 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11). The scene immediately before T2 of -12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI that suggests whether the item image A is displayed immediately before the display timing (T2) of the item image A. To do. The effect control CPU 120 also executes an item image display suggestion effect that suggests whether each item image is displayed immediately before the display timing of another item image such as the item image B.

FIG. 11-17 (B) shows a scene in which the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the display of the item image 027SHIGALV1 in the first display mode (level 1) is started) (FIG. 11-1).
1 and the scene of T2 in FIG. 11-12 (A)).

Item image display suggestion display 027SH suggesting whether item image A is displayed.
Regarding the relationship between IGA-SHI and item image A, item image display suggestion display 027S
When HIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may be displayed or the item image A may not be displayed. Further, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image A may be displayed at all times. Further, the item image A may be displayed when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, when the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed, the item image display suggestion display 027
The item image A may be displayed more easily than when SHIGA-SHI is not displayed. In addition, there are a plurality of types of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI, and the ratio of whether item image A is displayed or not is displayed depending on which type of item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI is displayed. It may be different. Item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image B is displayed 027SHIGB-SH
Relationship between I and item image B, item image display suggestion display suggesting whether item image C is displayed 027SHIGC-Relationship between SHI and item image C, item image display suggesting whether item image D is displayed The same applies to the relationship between the suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI and the item image D.

FIG. 11-17 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11 and C). FIG. 11-12 (A), a scene immediately before T6). That is, the effect control CPU 120 has an item image change suggestion display 027SHIG that suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes immediately before the change timing (T6) of the item image A.
The item image change suggestion effect using A-HEN is executed. The effect control CPU 12
0 is similarly set immediately before the change timing of other item images such as item image B.
The item image change suggestion effect that suggests whether the display mode of each item image changes is executed.

FIG. 11-18 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

It should be noted that the item image change suggestion display 0 suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes.
Regarding the relationship between 27SHIGA-HEN and item image A, when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may change or the display mode of the item image A may not change. You may do so. Also,
When the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed, the display mode of the item image A may be changed at any time. In addition, item image change suggestion display 027S
The display mode of the item image A may change when HIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, the display mode of the item image A may be changed more easily when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed than when the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is not displayed. Further, there are a plurality of types of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, and whether or not the display mode of the item image A changes depending on which type of the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN is displayed. The proportions may be different. Item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN and item image B suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes.
Relationship with, item image change suggestion display suggesting whether the display mode of item image C changes, relationship between 027SHIGC-HEN and item image C, item image change suggestion suggesting whether the display mode of item image D changes Display 027SHIGD-HEN and item image D
The same applies to the relationship with.

FIG. 11-18 (B) shows an item image change suggestion display using 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as in the scene of FIG. 11-17 (C). Is the scene (the scene immediately before T10 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)). FIG. 11-18 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect A is changed to the third display mode (level 3) (the scene of T10 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)).

FIG. 11-19 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)). That is, the effect control CPU 12
0 is the execution start timing (T14) of the fanning effect that fuels whether to execute the cut-in notice effect.
Immediately before, the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed. In addition, C for production control
The PU 120 also displays a fanning effect start display indicating that each fanning effect is executed (started) immediately before the execution start timing of the fanning effect that incites whether to execute another notice effect such as a group notice effect. indicate.

11-19 (B) to 11-20 (B) show a scene (FIG. 11SHIGA-AO) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A (FIG. 11-11 and T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-12 (A)). Figure 1
In the examples of 1-19 (B) to 11-20 (B), the countdown fanning display 027SHIGA-AO that counts down to the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect is performed. That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes a fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect immediately before the execution start timing (T14) of the cut-in notice effect. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 also executes a fanning effect that encourages whether to execute each advance notice effect immediately before the execution start timing of other advance notice effects such as the group advance notice effect.

FIG. 11-20 (C) shows a scene in which a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-J.
It is a scene where CI is displayed (scenes T15 to T16 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-12 (A)).

In addition, there are a fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI indicating that a fanning effect is executed to indicate whether to execute a cut-in notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and a notice effect corresponding to the item image A. Regarding the relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the cut-in notice effect, when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed,
There may be a case where the fanning effect is executed and a case where the fanning effect is not executed. Also,
When the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed, the fanning effect may always be executed. Further, the fanning effect may be executed when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, the fanning production start display 027SH
It may be easier to perform the fanning effect when the IGA-KAI is displayed than when the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is not displayed. In addition, the fanning production start display 0
There are multiple types of 27SHIGA-KAI, and any type of fanning effect start display 027S
Depending on whether HIGA-KAI is displayed, the ratio of whether or not to execute the fanning effect may be different. The fanning effect start display 027SHIGB-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B, and the group notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image B The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute, the button that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C. Image C
The relationship with the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advancement effect that corresponds to the item image D, and the instigation effect that incites whether to execute the character advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image D The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect start display 027SHIGD-KAI to be shown and the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

In addition, regarding the relationship between the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, and the cut-in notice effect, which is the notice effect corresponding to the item image A, the fan effect was executed. In some cases, the cut-in notice effect may be executed and the cut-in notice effect may not be executed (see FIG. 11-12 (B)).
Further, the cut-in notice effect may be executed whenever the fanning effect is executed. In addition, the cut-in notice effect may be executed when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, it may be easier to execute the cut-in notice effect when the fanning effect is executed than when the fanning effect is not executed. In addition, there are multiple types of fanning effects,
The ratio of whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed may be different depending on which type of fanning effect is executed. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the group advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image B and the group advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image B, and the advance notice effect that corresponds to the item image C. The relationship between the fanning effect that incites whether to execute the button advance notice effect and the button advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image C, and whether to execute the character advance notice effect that is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D. The same applies to the relationship between the fanning effect and the character advance notice effect, which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D.

11-21 to 11-30 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 027SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 11-21 to 11-30 show the example shown in FIG. 11-13 (A).
The main scenes are shown as an example, FIG. 11-21 (A) → FIG. 11-21 (B) →
FIG. 11-21 (C) → FIG. 11-22 (A) → FIG. 11-22 (B) → FIG. 11-22 (C) →
FIG. 11-23 (A) → FIG. 11-23 (B) → FIG. 11-23 (C) →, ..., FIG. 11-29 (
A) → FIG. 11-29 (B) → FIG. 11-29 (C) → FIG. 11-30 (A) → FIG. 11-30 (
B) → Transition in the order of FIG. 11-30 (C).

FIG. 11-21 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGA-SHI suggesting whether the item image A is displayed is being performed (in T2 of FIG. 11-11). The scene just before). In FIG. 11-21 (B), the execution of the item image effect A is started (that is, the item image 027SHIGAL in the first display mode (level 1)).
It is a scene (the scene of T2 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-21 (C) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGB-SHI suggesting whether the item image B is displayed is being performed (FIG. 11-11, T3). The scene just before). In FIG. 11-22 (A), the execution of the item image effect B is started (that is, the item image 027SHIGBL of the first display mode (level 1)).
It is a scene (the scene of T3 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-22 (B) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGC-SHI suggesting whether the item image C is displayed is being performed (FIG. 11-11, T4). The scene just before). In FIG. 11-22 (C), the execution of the item image effect C is started (that is, the item image 027SHIGCL of the first display mode (level 1)).
It is a scene (the scene of T4 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-23 (A) shows a scene in which the item image display suggestion effect using the item image display suggestion display 027SHIGD-SHI suggesting whether the item image D is displayed is being performed (FIG. 11-11, T5). The scene just before). In FIG. 11-23 (B), the execution of the item image effect D is started (that is, the item image 027SHIGDL of the first display mode (level 1)).
It is a scene (the scene of T5 in FIG. 11-11) where the display of V1 is started).

FIG. 11-23 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image A changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T6). FIG. 11-24 (A) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect A is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-24 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGB-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image B changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T7). FIG. 11-24 (C) is a scene (the scene of T7 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect B is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-25 (A) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGC-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image C changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T8). FIG. 11-25 (B) is a scene (the scene of T8 in FIG. 11-11) in which the item image effect C is changed to the second display mode (level 2).

FIG. 11-25 (C) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T9). FIG. 11-26 (A) is a scene in which the item image effect D does not change (the scene of T9 in FIG. 11-11).

FIG. 11-26 (B) shows a scene in which the item image change suggestion effect using the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGD-HEN suggesting whether the display mode of the item image D changes is performed (FIG. 11-11). The scene just before T13). 11-26 (C) is a scene in which the item image effect D does not change (the scene of T13 in FIG. 11-11). The item image effect C is changed to the third display mode (level 3) in the scene before the scene of 9-26 (C) (the scene of T12 in FIG. 11-11).

FIG. 11-27 (A) shows that the fanning effect for inciting whether to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is executed (started). This is a scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGA-KAI is displayed (the scene immediately before T14 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

FIG. 11-27 (B) shows a scene (FIG. 11-11) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGA-AO is performed to encourage whether to execute a cut-in notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A (FIG. 11-11).
And the scenes of T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-13 (A). FIG. 11-27 (C) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1), which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image A, is performed, that is, a scene in which the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed. (
11-11 and 11-13 (A), T15 to T16).

FIG. 11-28 (A) shows a group notice effect (YEP) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B.
-B) is executed or not. The fanning effect start display 0 indicating that the fanning effect is executed (started).
It is a scene displaying 27SHIGB-KAI (the scene immediately before T17 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).

11-28 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIG. 11-11) A) scenes T17 to T18). FIG. 11-28 (C) shows a scene in which a group notice effect, which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image B, is performed, that is, the group image 027S.
Scene where HYKE-GN is displayed (T18 in FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A))
~ T19 scene).

FIG. 11-29 (A) shows a button notice effect (Y) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C.
A scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGC-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute EP-C1 and YEP-C2) is executed (started) is displayed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13). A) The scene immediately before T20).

11-29 (B) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIGS. 11-11) and 11-13 (FIG. 11-11) and FIG. A) scenes from T20 to T21). FIGS. 11-29 (C) to 11-
30 (A) is a button notice effect (YEP-C1) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image C.
) Is performed, that is, the button image 027SHYKE-BU is displayed, and the weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI is displayed as an example after the operation of the push button 31B (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-). 13 (A), scenes T21 to T22).

FIG. 11-30 (B) shows a character advance notice effect (YE) which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D.
A scene in which the fanning effect start display 027SHIGD-KAI indicating that the fanning effect that incites whether to execute (PD) is executed (started) is displayed (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13 (A)).
The scene just before T23).

FIG. 11-30 (C) shows a scene (FIGS. 11-11 and 11-13) in which a fanning effect 027SHIGD-AO is performed to incite whether or not to execute a character advance notice effect which is a notice effect corresponding to the item image D. (A) scenes T23 to T24). In addition, after the fanning effect, the character advance notice effect which is the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image D is not performed (FIG. 11-13 (A)).
reference).

In the examples of FIGS. 11-16 to 11-30, each item image display suggestion display (027SHIGA-SHI, 027SHIGB-SHI, 0) suggesting the display of each item image.
27SHIGC-SHI, 027SHIGD-SHI) are common, but may be different for each item image. In addition, each of the notice productions (027SHIGA-A)
O, 027SHIGB-AO, 027SHIGC-AO, 027SHIGD-AO) are common, but may be different for each notice effect (that is, for each item image). Fanning effect start display (027SHIGA-KAI) indicating the start of each fanning effect corresponding to each notice effect
, 027SHIGB-KAI, 027SHIGC-KAI, 027SHIGD-KAI)
Although they are common to each other, they may be different depending on which preview effect is to be started (that is, for each item image).

(Suggested setting value)
Subsequently, the suggestion of the set value (see FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH suggests a set value currently set by using the item image effect (for example, using the item image). For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH is shown in FIGS. 11-31 (A) and 11-.
As shown in 31 (B), the display mode of the fourth display mode (level 4) is provided as the display mode of the item image D in the item image effect D, and the item image D of the fourth display mode is displayed. However, it may suggest the currently set value.

(First example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (C), when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed (the movable body 027SH32 is in operation). It may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, the set value is 4 or more).

(Second example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (D), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed → off. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Third example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (E), when the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (the movable body 027SH32 is not operated). (Any result of hit or miss), it may be suggested that the currently set value is set high (for example, set value 4 or more).

(Fourth example)
For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 (F), it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed → is out of order. It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).

(Fifth example)
Further, although not shown, it is currently set when the item image D in the fourth display mode is displayed → off (regardless of whether or not the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed). It may be suggested that the set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more).
(Display timing of the fourth display mode (level 4))

In the first example (the same may apply to each of the second to fourth examples), the display timing of the item image D in the fourth display mode is not particularly limited (that is, it is displayed from the beginning). It may be displayed differently from other display modes), but as an example, the display period may be lengthened so as to be easily recognized by the player. Specifically, FIG. 11-32 (
As shown as the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" in A), the item image D of the fourth display mode may be displayed from the first (T5 in FIG. 11-11). In addition, in FIG. 11-32 (A), the fourth display mode is generally colored in gold to make the player recognize that the hit is confirmed or rich, but the item image D in the fourth display mode is disengaged after the display. When the possibility of becoming non-zero (for example, in the case of the second example or the like), the fourth display mode may be a color or pattern different from gold.

(An example of the determination ratio of the first example)
In the case of the first example, as the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern of the item image effect D (IGEP-D) in the case of executing the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).
Instead of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-10 (G), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32 (B) is used, and the item image effect is produced when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed. FIG. 1 shows the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern of D (IGEP-D).
Instead of the determination ratio shown in 1-10 (H), the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-32 (C) may be used. That is, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step 027SHS134 of FIG. 11-15, the item image effect execution mode pattern is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), and the step of FIG. 11-15. In 027SHS135, the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 11-32 (C).

That is, there is no case where the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not performed (see FIG. 11-32 (C)), but the item image in the fourth display mode. There is a case where the display of D → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is performed (the movable body 027SH32 is operated) (see FIG. 11-32 (B)), and the item image of the fourth display mode. There is a setting difference in the transition from the display of D to the execution of the character notice effect (YEP-D) (YEP-D).
(See FIG. 11-32 (B)). In the example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" is determined at a rate of 1% when the current set value is any of the set values 1 to 3. If the current set value is any of the set values 4 to 6, 15
Determined at a rate of%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is performed when the set value is 1-3. There are more cases where the set value is 4-6 than. That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 11-32 (B), the fourth setting is higher (for example, the set value is 4 or more) than the low setting (for example, the set value is 3 or less). The frequency of transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) increases. Therefore, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D).
) Is executed (or the frequency of transition is high) suggests that the currently set value is set high (for example, the set value is 4 or more).

In the example shown in FIGS. 11-32 (B), Super Reach A (variation patterns # 13, #)
Whether it is 17) or Super Reach B (variation patterns # 14, # 18), the item image production execution mode pattern "IG" is used when the character effect is executed.
"EGP6" can be determined (if it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it is determined at a rate of 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it is determined at a rate of 15%. However, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be determined only when the character effect is executed in the case of Super Reach B (when the character effect is Super Reach A). When executed, the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6"
May not be determined). In other words, in the case of Super Reach B
Display of item image D in the 4th display mode → Execution of character notice effect (YEP-D) Yes (movable body 0)
There is a setting difference in the transition from 27SH32 operation), while in the case of Super Reach A, the display of the item image D in the 4th display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP).
There may be no setting difference between the transition of −D) with execution (with the operation of the movable body 027SH32).

(An example of the determination ratio of the second example)
In the case of the second example, for example, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32 is present) → the jackpot. Although there is no setting difference in, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → the character advance notice effect (YEP-D)
) Is executed (movable body 027SH32 is operated) → off, there may be a setting difference. For example, the setting value 1 is the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed in the case of a super reach jackpot.
While it is common to ~ 6 (for example, 20%), the determination ratio of the item image production execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed when the super reach is lost is set to the case of the set values 1 to 3. It may be different from the case of the value 4 to 6 (for example, the set value 1 to 3).
If it is any of the above, it may be 1%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 10%).

In the case of Super Reach B, the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode →
There is a setting difference in the transition from the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) (the movement of the movable body 027SH32) to the deviation, while the fourth display mode is in the case of Super Reach A. Display of item image D → Execution of character notice production (YEP-D) Yes (movable body 02)
There may be no setting difference in the transition of 7SH32 with operation) → off.

(An example of the determination ratio of the third example)
In the case of the third example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode to the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D), but the fourth example. There may be a setting difference in the transition from the display of the item image D in the display mode to the non-execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). For example, the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the character effect is executed is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 10%), while the item image effect is not executed when the character effect is not executed. The determination ratio of the execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" may be different between the cases of the set values 1 to 3 and the cases of the set values 4 to 6 (for example, the set value 1).
If it is any of ~ 3, it may be 0.5%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fourth example)
In the case of the fourth example, for example, there is no setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → big hit. There may be a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → no execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) → off. For example, Super Reach jackpot (variable pattern #
In 17 and # 18), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the accessory effect is not executed is set to be common to the set values 1 to 6 (for example, 5%), while the super reach is lost (variation pattern # 13). , # 14), the determination ratio of the item image effect execution mode pattern "IGEGP6" when the accessory effect is not executed may be different between the case of the set value 1 to 3 and the case of the set value 4 to 6 (for example). If it is any of the set values 1 to 3, it may be 0.5%, and if it is any of the set values 4 to 6, it may be 3%).

(An example of the determination ratio of the fifth example)
In the case of the fifth example, the details are omitted, but for example, the item image D of the fourth display mode is used.
There is no setting difference in the transition of the display → big hit, but there may be a setting difference in the transition of the display of the item image D in the fourth display mode → off.

In the above description, an example suggesting that the currently set value is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more) has been described, but the target of the suggestion is not limited to the high setting. For example, the negation of the minimum setting (setting value 1) (setting value 2 or more) may be suggested, or each setting value of setting value 1 to setting value 6 may be suggested. That is, in the above, an example has been described in which the determination ratios of the item image effect execution mode patterns are divided into two, the set values 1 to 3 and the set values 4 to 6, and the determination ratios are different. The item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined differently by dividing into 6 and the item image effect execution mode pattern may be determined by dividing each of the set values 1 to 6 into 6 items. May be different.

(About the modified example of the game machine related to the feature part 027SH)
Subsequently, a modification of FIGS. 11-1 to 11-32 will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image match. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the display start timing of the item images A to D is the display start timing of the item image A (T2) → the display start timing of the item image B (T).
3) → Display start timing of item image C (T4) → Display start timing of item image D (T5), and the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to item images A to D is item image A. Execution start timing of cut-in notice production corresponding to (T15)
) → Execution start timing of the group notice effect corresponding to the item image B (T18) → Execution start timing of the button notice effect corresponding to the item image C (T21) → Execution start timing of the character notice effect corresponding to the item image D The order is (T24), and the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image are the same. However, the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image do not have to match. For example, item image A → item image B are displayed in this order.
The group notice effect corresponding to the item image B → the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the item image A may be executed in this order. Further, when the item image A → the item image B are displayed in this order, the cut-in notice effect → the group notice effect may be executed in the order, or the group notice effect → the cut-in notice effect may be executed in the order. You may do so.

(Modification example 2 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display start timing of each item image is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the item image A is T1 and the item image B is T2.
, Item image C is T3, and item image D is T4. However, the display start timing of each item image does not have to be different individually. For example, the display start timings of two of the four types of item images A to D may be displayed at the same time, or 4
The display start timings of three types of item images may be simultaneous, or the display start timings of all four types of item images may be simultaneous.

(Modification example 3 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the change timing of each item image to the second display mode (level 2) is different is described. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the item image A is T.
6. Item image B is T7, item image C is T8, and item image D is T9. However, the timing of changing each item image to the second display mode (level 2) does not have to be different individually. For example, the timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) of two types of the four types of item images A to D may be simultaneous, or three types of the four types of item images. The timing of changing to the second display mode (level 2) may be the same, or the timing of changing all four types of item images to the second display mode (level 2) may be simultaneous. The same applies to the timing of change to the third display mode (level 3).

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 027SH)
In the example shown in FIGS. 11-11 and the like, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image A is always the first.
Although it is a display mode (level 1), the display mode at the start of display may be a second display mode (level 2) or a third display mode (level 3). The same applies to the item image B, the item image C, and the item image D. As described above, when the item image D may be in the fourth display mode (level 4), the display mode at the start of display may be the fourth display mode (level 4).

(Variation example 5 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the display mode of the item image does not change at the timing after any of the notice effects is executed (that is, at the change timing when the display mode of the item image changes, any of the notice effects is executed An example) that is earlier than the above was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, none of the item images changes at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the display mode of the item image may be changed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Variation example 6 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the item image is not newly displayed at the timing after one of the notice effects is executed (that is, the display start timing of the item image is earlier than the timing when any of the notice effects is executed. Example) was explained. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, no item image is newly displayed at the timing after the earliest executed cut-in notice effect is executed (after T15). However, the item image may be newly displayed at the timing after any of the advance notice effects is executed.

(Modification example 7 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect do not overlap has been described, but the execution periods of a certain advance notice effect and another advance notice effect may overlap. That is, when the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → the execution start timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of another advance notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain advance notice effect, or the execution start timing of a certain advance notice effect → another The execution start timing of the notice effect → the execution end timing of a certain notice effect → the execution end timing of another notice effect may be set.

(Modification example 8 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image and the notice effect are one-to-one, such as the item image A and the cut-in notice effect, the item image B and the group notice effect, the item image C and the button notice effect, and the item image D and the character notice effect. An example of correspondence was explained. That is, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, it is the cut-in notice effect that can be executed based on the item image A being deleted (used as an item), and the item image B is deleted. It is a group notice effect that can be executed based on, and it is a button notice effect that can be executed based on the item image C being deleted, and it can be executed based on the item image D being deleted. Explained that it was a notice production of the character. However, the item image and the advance notice effect do not necessarily have to have a one-to-one correspondence.

For example, a plurality of advance notice effects (for example, item image X) for a certain item image (for example, item image X).
For example, a cut-in notice effect, a group notice effect) may be associated with each other. When the item image X is associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the item image X is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that is deleted. It should be noted that the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect may be executed based on the erasure of the item image X.

Further, for example, one notice effect (for example, cut-in notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the cut-in notice effect is associated with the item image X and the item image Y, the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, and the case where the cut-in notice effect is executed.
The cut-in notice effect may be executed based on the fact that the item image Y is deleted. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the rate at which the advance notice effect is executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be erased. In the above example, in addition to the display mode of the item image X and the item image Y when deleted, the cut-in notice effect is executed according to whether the item image X is deleted or the item image Y is deleted. You may make different proportions.

Further, for example, a plurality of notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect) may be associated with a plurality of item images (for example, item image X and item image Y). When the item image X and the item image Y are associated with the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect, only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X. , When only the group notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image X, when only the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the deletion of the item image Y, and when the item image Y is executed. In some cases, only the group notice effect is executed based on the fact that it is erased. When the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image X, or the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed based on the erasure of the item image Y. It may be executed. In addition to the display mode of the item image when it is erased, the ratio of the advance notice effect to be executed and the ratio of the type of the advance notice effect to be executed may be different depending on the type of the item image to be deleted. Good.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above description, the item image can specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display, but the item image may not be able to specify the notice effect having a corresponding relationship at the time of the start of display. For example, the item image A corresponding to the cut-in notice effect is displayed in a display mode (for example, plain) in which the corresponding notice effect cannot be specified at the display start timing, and the corresponding notice effect is displayed at the change timing. May be changed from an unspecified display mode (for example, plain) to a identifiable display mode (first display mode, second display mode, etc.) for the corresponding advance notice effect.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example in which a plurality of item images of the same type are not displayed has been described, but a plurality of item images of the same type may be displayed. For example, when two item images A of the first display mode (level 1) are displayed side by side, or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) and the item image A of the second display mode (level 2) are displayed side by side. And may be displayed side by side. When N items of a certain type are displayed, the advance notice effect corresponding to the item images is executed up to N times.

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the display mode of the item image changes, but the type of the item image does not change. However, the type of the item image may also change. For example, the first display mode (level 1)
) Is changed to the item image B of the first display mode (level 1), or the item image A of the first display mode (level 1) is the item image of the second display mode (level 2). It may change to B. The display mode is demoted (level 3 → level 2) when the type is changed such that the item image A of the third display mode (level 3) changes to the item image B of the second display mode (level 2). There may be cases.

(Modification example 12 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, there are four types of notice effects, and there are four types of item images corresponding to the notice effects, but the item images and the notice effects do not have to be four types. For example, in relation to the above-described modification 8, the item image may be 2 types and the notice effect may be 5 types, the item image may be 5 types, and the notice effect may be 2 types. In addition, one type of item image and one type of notice effect may be used.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 027SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the timing of erasing the item image is the timing of executing the fanning effect for inciting the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image, but the timing of erasing the item image is not limited to this. For example, the timing to delete the item image is
It may be the timing when the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed. In other words
The item image may be continuously displayed during the execution period of the fanning effect and deleted at the start of execution of the advance notice effect (at the end of the fanning effect). Specifically, in FIGS. 11-11, the item image A is deleted by T15 instead of T14, and the item image B is replaced by T17 by T18.
The item image C may be erased in T21 instead of T20, and the item image D may be erased in T24 instead of T23.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image A is erased at the start of the fanning effect (T14 in FIG. 11-11).
An example of not displaying during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 to T15 in FIG. 11-11) or the period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T16 in FIG. 11-11) (cut-in in the case of the above-mentioned modification 13). It is erased at the start of the notice effect (T15) and during the cut-in notice effect (Fig. 11-1).
An example) that is not displayed in T15 to T16) of 1 has been described. That is, an example has been described in which the item image A is erased by the start of the cut-in notice effect at the latest and is not displayed during the cut-in notice effect. However, the item image A may be displayed during the cut-in notice effect without being erased. That is, the item image A may not be erased even if it is used.
The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 027SH)
In relation to the above-described modification 14, when the used item image A is not erased, it may be possible to recognize that the used item image A has been used. For example, if the display mode of the item image A immediately before the start of the fanning effect for fanning the cut-in notice effect is the second display mode (level 2) (the first display mode (level 1) or the third display mode (level 1)). 3)), at the start of the fanning effect that fuels the cut-in notice effect, the second display mode (level 2) → the fanning effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "fanning effect is in progress". ”, Etc.), and at the start of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording“ notice effect in progress ”etc. is displayed). , At the end of the cut-in advance notice effect, the advance notice effect execution mode → the advance notice effect end mode (for example, the color may be grayed down or monochrome, and the word “finished” or the like may be displayed). That is, for the item image A, during the execution period of the fanning effect (T14 ~
T15) is defined as the "fanning effect execution mode", and during the execution period of the cut-in notice effect (T15 to T1)
6) may be set as the "notice effect execution mode", and after the end of the cut-in notice effect (T16 ~) may be set as the "notice effect end mode". The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

If the cut-in notice effect is not executed after the fanning effect, at the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect, the fanning effect execution mode → the notice effect non-execution mode (for example, the color is grayed down or monochrome, and the wording "notice" A mode in which "directing non-execution" or the like is displayed) may be used. That is, with respect to the item image A, the "fanning effect execution mode" may be set during the execution period (T14 to T15) of the fanning effect, and the "notice effect non-execution mode" may be set after the end of the fanning effect (T15 to). The same applies to other item images (item image B, item image C, item image D).

The above-mentioned fanning effect execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image. For example, it may be plain, and the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed. The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

In addition, instead of the above, the fanning effect execution mode may be one according to the type of the item image. For example, the color may be grayed down or the wording "in the process of fanning" or the like may be displayed within a range in which a pattern (see FIG. 11-9) corresponding to the type of the item image can be recognized.
The advance notice effect execution mode, the advance notice effect end mode, and the advance notice effect non-execution mode may be common regardless of the type of the item image.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, an example of executing the notice effect after executing the fan effect (an example of executing the fan effect before executing the notice effect) has been described, but it is not necessary to execute the notice effect after executing the fan effect (notice effect). You don't have to perform the fanning effect before executing). That is, after the item image is used, the advance notice effect may be executed without executing the fanning effect.

(Modification example 17 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during the super reach effect, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed during another period. For example, the flow may be variable display start → item image A display start → reach → item image A deletion → cut-in notice effect execution, or variable display start → item image A display start → reach → super reach. → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, or start variable display → Reach → Start display item image A → Delete item image A → Execute cut-in notice effect, The flow may be as follows: variable display start → reach → display start of item image A → development into super reach → deletion of item image A → execution of cut-in notice effect.

(Modification example 18 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image effect (display of the item image) and the notice effect are executed during one variation, but the item image effect and the advance notice effect may be executed over a plurality of variations.

For example, it is necessary to display all the necessary item images (item images for which display is determined) in one fluctuation, and delete all the displayed item images in the other fluctuation after the next fluctuation. It is also possible to execute all the notice effects (notice effects for which execution is decided). For example, the item image A, the item image B, and the item image C are displayed on the first change → the item image A, during the change after some changes (for example, during any change from the second change to the fourth change). The flow is that the item image B and the item image C are all erased (each item image can be changed between the start of display and the deletion) and the necessary advance notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, all necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are displayed during a certain fluctuation, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to produce a necessary notice (a notice effect). The advance notice effect for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example
Item image A, item image B, and item image C are displayed on the first variation, and item image A is deleted on the first variation (item image A can be changed between display start and deletion). Execute (cut-in notice effect) → Delete item image B on the 2nd change (item image B can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → 3rd change The flow of erasing the item image C (the item image C can be changed between the start of display and the erasure) and executing the necessary notice effect (button notice effect), and the item image A, item image B, and item in the first variation. Start displaying image C → Erase item image A on the second change (item image A can change between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) → Item image on the third change Erase B (item image B can be changed between display start and erase) and execute the necessary notice effect (group notice effect) → Erase item image C at the 4th change (item image C is between display start and erase) It is a flow to execute the necessary notice effect (button notice effect).

Further, for example, in one other fluctuation in which necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations and all necessary item images have been displayed.
You may delete all the displayed item images and execute all the necessary notice effects (notice effects for which execution is determined). For example, the item image A starts to be displayed on the first variation → the item image B starts to be displayed on the second variation → the item image C starts to be displayed on the third variation, and the third
The flow of erasing all the item image A, item image B, and item image C in the variable eye (each item image can be changed between the start of display and erasing) and executing the necessary notice effect, and the item in the first variable eye. Start displaying image A → Start displaying item image B on the 2nd change → Start displaying item image C on the 3rd change → Erase all item image A, item image B, and item image C on the 4th change (each item image) Can be changed between the start of display and erasure) and the necessary notice effect is executed.

Further, for example, necessary item images (item images for which display presence is determined) are sequentially displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the displayed item images are sequentially deleted over a plurality of fluctuations to provide a necessary notice. The production (notice production for which execution is determined) may be sequentially executed. For example
It is necessary to start displaying the item image A on the first change → start displaying the item image B on the second change and delete the item image A on the second change (the item image A can change between the start of display and the deletion). A notice effect (cut-in notice effect) is executed, and the item image B is deleted at the third change (the item image B can be changed between the start of display and the deletion), and the necessary notice effect (group notice effect)
For example, the item image A is displayed on the first variation → the item image B is displayed on the second variation → the item image A is deleted on the third variation (the item image A is between the display start and the deletion). Execute the necessary notice effect (cut-in notice effect) and delete the item image B at the 4th variation (item image B can be changed between the start of display and erasure) and the necessary notice effect (can be changed to) It is a flow to execute the group notice production).

(Modified example 19 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, the item image is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9 and 11-14), but the lookahead notice setting process (step S161).
The item image may be determined within. Variable display start setting process (step S1
In the mode of determining the item image in 71), the item image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 11-10), but in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161). When determining the item image in, the received symbol specification command (effect control command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, sudden probability)) and fluctuation The item image may be determined based on the content of the category specification command (the effect control command indicating the category (type) of the determined variation pattern). It should be noted that a plurality of item images may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item image may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. .. That is, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variation, or one item image may be associated with each variation.

(Modification example 20 of the feature portion 027SH)
In the above, as an effect when the item image is used after the item image is displayed, an example of executing a notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. However, the notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used has been described. There may be a case where a different kind of advance notice effect is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed based on the erasure of the item image A, but the group notice effect is based on the erasure of the item image A. May be executed. Further, as an example related to the modification 8, a plurality of advance notice effects (for example, for example, item image X) are given to a certain item image (for example, item image X).
When the cut-in notice effect and group notice effect are associated with each other, the above-mentioned plurality of advance notice effects (for example, cut-in notice effect and group notice effect) are deleted based on the item image X being deleted.
There may be a case where a different notice effect (for example, a character advance notice effect) is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, in a mode in which a different type of advance notice effect from the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of item image to be used may be executed, a different type of advance notice effect from the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of item image to be used is executed. The jackpot expectation may be higher in the case than in the case of executing the advance notice effect corresponding to the type of the item image to be used.

(Modification example 21 of the feature portion 027SH)
Although the suggestion of the set value has been described with reference to FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the suggestion of the set value is not limited to this.

For example, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 1, the determination ratio of whether or not to match the order of the display start timing of each item image and the order of the execution start timing of each notice effect corresponding to each item image is set. A setting difference may be provided to suggest a set value in relation to whether the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect match. As an example, the ratio of matching the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect is set to 95% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less).
When the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 85%, and the order of the display start timing of the item image and the order of the execution start timing of the advance notice effect do not match (or often do not match). It may be suggested that the setting is high (for example, the set value is 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above order rules (in principle, the order is the same) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so the high setting is made due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the law). It may be suggested.

Further, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 2, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and it is related to whether the display start timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. However, the set value may be suggested. As an example, the ratio of displaying start timings of a plurality of item images at the same time is set to 5% when the setting is low (for example, 3 or less) and 15% when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more). , It may be suggested that the fact that the change timings of the plurality of item images match (or the frequency of matching is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency of breaking the above display start timing rule (the principle is not simultaneous) is higher in the high setting (5% in the low setting, 15% in the high setting), so it is higher due to the breaking of the law (frequency of breaking the rule). It may suggest a setting. Similarly, in relation to the above-mentioned modification 3, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of whether or not the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous, and whether the change timings of the plurality of item images are simultaneous. It may be related and suggest a setting value.

Further, in relation to the above-described modification 4, a setting difference is provided in the determination ratio of the display mode at the start of displaying the item image, and the set value is suggested in relation to the display mode at the start of displaying the item image. May be good. As an example, the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the first display mode (level 1) or the second display mode (level 2), and the ratio of the second display mode (level 2) is set low (for example,). If it is 3 or less), it is set to 3%, if it is set to a high setting (for example, 4 or more), it is set to 9%, and the display mode at the start of displaying the item image is the second display mode (level 2). It may be suggested that (or the frequency of the second display mode (level 2) is high) is a high setting (for example, a set value of 4 or more). In other words, the frequency at which the law regarding the display mode at the start of displaying the item image (in principle, the first display mode (level 1)) is broken is higher in the high setting (3% in the low setting, 9% in the high setting). High setting may be suggested by breaking the law (frequency of breaking the law).

Further, the set value may be suggested in the advance notice effect. For example, regarding a strong cut-in image (Fig. 11-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, C, etc.) By preparing two types of strong cut-in images and providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the types of the strong cut-in images, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) for displaying the strong cut-in image, if the setting is low (for example, 3 or less), "normal strong cut-in image" Is determined at a rate of 95% and "special strong cut-in image" is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), "normal strong cut-in image" is determined at 80% and "special". The "strong cut-in image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) that displays a strong cut-in image.
In 2), the fact that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed (or the "special strong cut-in image" is frequently displayed) is a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or more). You may try to suggest that.

Further, for example, for a group image (FIG. 11-5 (C), etc.), two types of group images, a normal group image (character A group) and a special group image (character B group), are prepared, and the group image is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the group image. Specifically, for example, after deciding to execute the group notice effect (YEP-B), the low setting (
For example, in the case of 3 or less), 95% of the "normal group image" and 5% of the "special group image".
If the setting is high (for example, 4 or more), the "normal group image" is 80%.
, "Special group image" may be determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the group notice effect (YEP-B) for displaying the group image, it is set high that the "special group image" is displayed (or the "special group image" is frequently displayed). (For example, it may be suggested that the set value is 4 or more).

In addition, the set value may be suggested in the super reach. For example, for Super Reach B (variable patterns # 16 and # 18), normal super reach production (battle production in background 1 etc.), special super reach production (battle production in background 2 etc.)
By preparing two types of super reach effects, and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the type of super reach effects of super reach B, the set value may be suggested in the super reach effects of super reach B. .. In addition, it may be related to the jackpot and suggest a set value. For example, for the start effect (fanfare effect) of the big hit game state of the third big hit (see Fig. 11-2), two types of fanfare effects, a normal fanfare effect and a special fanfare effect, are prepared, and the fanfare effect in the third big hit is prepared. By providing a setting difference in the determination ratio of the type of, the set value may be suggested in the fanfare effect in the third big hit.

Further, the item image may suggest that the set value is suggested later. For example, the item image may suggest that the set value is suggested in the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (Eg, the wording "
Notice with setting suggestion? The item image A may be displayed. That is, in the item image A of the above aspect, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect is performed, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" is used in the cut-in notice effect. Is suggested to be displayed. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, the item image A may be displayed (a mode in which the wording "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed). That is, the item image A of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the advance notice effect shown in FIG. 11-4 has a set value in a different effect (may be an effect related to the jackpot reliability, or may be an effect not related to the jackpot reliability). The item image may suggest that the suggestion is made.

Further, it may be suggested by a method other than the item image that the setting value is suggested later. In other words, the item image may not suggest that the set value is suggested later. For example, it may be suggested that the setting value is suggested in the advance notice effect by the fanning effect of the advance notice effect. As an example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which a setting value is suggested, and a cut-in notice effect is performed, the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect. (For example, a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion?" Is displayed in the vicinity of the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, it is uncertain whether or not the cut-in notice effect is performed in the fanning effect of the above aspect, but if the cut-in notice effect is performed, the "special strong cut-in image" in the cut-in notice effect. It is suggested to display. As another example, when it is decided to display a "special strong cut-in image" in which the setting value is suggested, the mode suggesting that the setting value is suggested in the cut-in notice effect ( For example, a fanning effect of (a mode in which a word such as "notice with setting suggestion!" Is displayed near the number to be counted down) may be executed. That is, the fanning effect of the above aspect suggests that the cut-in notice effect is performed and that the "special strong cut-in image" is displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

It should be noted that the suggestion of the set value may not be suggested at all later. In other words
The set value may be suggested without any suggestion in advance (without suggesting even the item image or suggesting other than the item image.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In the slot machine that draws with high probability, during the high probability period that visits periodically,
It is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to another state, and in the period before the high probability period, item images that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed are displayed. After making it displayable, the rate at which the notice effect of the type specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed may be different depending on the display mode of the item image.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first Second period of favorable condition (for example, the latter half of the period of the first advantageous state ~
In the final period), it is possible to execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects having different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state, and in the first period prior to the second period of the first advantageous state, After making it possible to display an item image that can specify the type of advance notice effect to be executed, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is executed after the item image is displayed depending on the display mode of the item image. The proportions may be different.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 027SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 027SH)
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) and provided with an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing an effect, the effect executing means , Within a predetermined period (for example, T15 to T16, T18 to T shown in FIGS. 11-11).
19, T21 to T22, T24 to T25, multiple types of advance notice effects (for example, multiple types of advance notice effects shown in Fig. 11-4) are executed during the period before the lottery period with high probability. A specific display (for example, FIG. 1) that is possible and can specify the type of the advance notice effect to be executed.
A specific effect (for example, the item image effect shown in FIG. 11-8 (A)) that displays a plurality of types of item images shown in 1-9 (A) to (L) before the predetermined period. 11-7 (A) to (F) show, for example, the rate at which the content advantageous to the player is notified differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect executed within the predetermined period. As described above, there are cases where the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed and cases where the notice effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 11-). 10
(A) (C) (E) (G) When the notice effect of (G) is executed, the item image is displayed. When the item image effect execution mode patterns "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5" are determined, after the item image is displayed. Item image effect execution mode pattern for displaying an item image when the advance notice effect of the type specified by the item image is executed and the advance notice effect of FIGS. 11-10 (B) (D) (F) (H) is not executed. "IGEGP2" to "IGEGP5"
When is determined, the type of advance notice effect specified by the item image is not executed after the item image is displayed, and there are a plurality of display modes of the specific display (for example, FIG. 11-9 (A).
)-(L), the rate at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, FIG. 11-8 (B)). ,
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) to 11-10, the rate at which the advance notice effect corresponding to the item image is executed after the item image is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the item image. Specifically, the rate at which the notice effect is executed is such that the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the third display mode (level 3)> the display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the second display. Aspect (level 2)> The display mode of the item image corresponding to the notice effect is the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the game machine, the ratio of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is executed after the specific display is displayed differs depending on the display mode of the specific display. Therefore, the player pays attention to the display mode of the specific display. The interest of the game is improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1, the specific display changes to a special mode corresponding to the execution period of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the type of advance notice effect specified by the specific display). Possible (for example, for item image A, when the cut-in notice effect is executed (T1)
5) can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode"), and the special mode of the specific display is common regardless of the type of the specific display (for example, common regardless of the type of the item image). You may.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is being executed (the item image is used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed and which specific display corresponds to the advance notice effect being executed.

(Means 3 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 and means 2, the specific display can be changed to a special mode after the execution of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect of the type specified by the specific display). (For example, for item image A, at the end of execution of the cut-in notice effect (T)
16) may be changed to "preliminary effect end mode").

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to clearly notify that the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display has been executed (the item image has been used). In addition, it is possible to clearly notify which specific display corresponds to the executed notice effect and which specific display corresponds to the executed advance notice effect.

(Means 4 for Feature 027SH)
In the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3, a plurality of types of the specific display can be displayed as the specific effect within a specific period prior to the predetermined period (for example, T2 to T2 shown in FIGS. 11-11). Up to four types of item images can be displayed in T14, etc.), and the specific display of each type may be displayed in any of the display modes (for example, in the scene of FIGS. 11-26 (C), the item image). A is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), the item image B is displayed in the second display mode (level 2), and the item image C is displayed in the third display mode (level 3).
The item image D is displayed according to the first display mode (level 1)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to the display mode of each type of specific display, the interest is improved.

(Means 5 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 2 can execute the advance notice effect at a plurality of timings within the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11, T15, T18, T21, T2.
The advance notice effect can be executed at a plurality of execution start timings such as 4, and the execution timing of the advance notice effect differs depending on the type of the advance notice effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-11). The execution start timing of the in-notice effect is T15, the execution start timing of the group advance notice effect is T18, the execution start timing of the button advance notice effect is T21, the execution start timing of the character advance notice effect is T24, and so on, depending on the type of advance notice effect. ), The timing at which the specific display becomes the special mode differs depending on the type of the notice effect corresponding to the specific display (for example, the notice effect specified by the specific display) (for example, the item image A is cut-in). It is possible to change to the "notice effect execution mode" when the advance notice effect is executed (T15).
The item image B can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the group notice effect is executed (T18), and the item image C can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" when the button notice effect is executed (T21). Yes, since the item image D can be changed to the "notice effect execution mode" at the time of executing the character advance notice effect (T24), the timing at which the item image becomes the "notice effect execution mode" is specified by the item image. It may be (depending on the type of advance notice production).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since the execution timing of the advance notice effect corresponding to the specific display is different, the complexity of the effect can be reduced.

(Means 6 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 5 are used when the specific display capable of specifying the type of the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect, and before the execution of the advance notice effect. There are cases where the specific display that can specify the type of effect is not displayed (for example, in the example of FIG. 11-13 (B), the item image B corresponding to the button advance effect is displayed before the button advance effect is executed. However, the item image D corresponding to the character advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the character advance notice effect), and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect. The rate at which the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the advance notice effect is different from that in the case where the content advantageous to the player is notified, for example, FIG. 11-8 (Fig. 11-8). B),
As shown in FIGS. 11-10 (A) to 11-10, when the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and the item corresponding to the notice effect before the advance notice effect is executed. Since the execution rate of the notice effect is different from when the image is not displayed, the item image corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, and the notice effect is supported before the advance notice effect is executed. When the item image is not displayed, the jackpot expectation may be different as shown in FIGS. 11-7 (A) to 11-7 (F)).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the interest is improved because attention is paid to what kind of production flow will be.

(Means 7 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 6 can change the display mode of the specific display after the display of the specific display (see, for example, FIG. 11-8), and an effect suggesting a change in the display mode of the specific display. (
For example, the item image change suggestion display 027SHIGA-HEN, which suggests whether the display mode of the item image A changes, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (C) can be executed. May be good.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since attention is paid to whether the specific display changes, the interest is improved.

(Means 8 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 7 can execute variable display of identification information, and pre-reading determination means (for example, a CPU for effect control) for pre-reading whether or not a content advantageous to the player is notified.
The lookahead notice setting process (step S161) according to 120) is provided, and the predetermined period is a period corresponding to a plurality of variable displays, and the specific display may be displayed based on the lookahead determination. Good. For example, a plurality of item images may be associated with one variable display, or one item image may be associated with each variable display.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the degree of attention to the fluctuation executed later is increased, and the interest is improved.

(Means 9 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 8 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), and the set value is suggested in at least a part of the advance notice effects of the plurality of types. You may. For example, for a strong cut-in image (Fig. 11-5 (B), etc.), a normal strong cut-in image (appearance of characters A, B, etc.) and a special strong cut-in image (character A,
By preparing two types of strong cut-in images (such as the appearance of C) and setting a difference in the determination ratio of the type of strong cut-in image, the set value may be suggested in the strong cut-in image. ..

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to paying attention to whether the advance notice effect is executed after the display of the specific display, whether or not there is a suggestion of the set value in the advance notice effect displayed after the display of the specific display, the interest is improved. ..

(Means 10 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , May be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display is focused on the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the notice effect before the execution of the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, the item image effect may suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect, and since there is a relationship between the item image effect and the setting suggestion effect, the interest is improved.

(Means 11 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value which is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the specific display is , It may be displayed corresponding to the advance notice effect to be executed, but may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Item image production that displays the item image corresponding to the notice production before the execution of the notice production, and
If the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is associated with the effect, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be lowered. Since the item image production and the setting suggestion production are independent of each other, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 12 pertaining to feature unit 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), and the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and as the specific display. The setting suggestion effect may be executed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 and 11-32, the item image D (level 4) may be used to suggest the set value.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, the specific display is focused on the suggestion of the set value, so that the interest is further improved. If there is no relationship between the item image effect that displays the item image corresponding to the advance notice effect before the execution of the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, there is a risk that the interest will be insufficient. In the above-mentioned game machine, since the item image production is also a setting suggestion production, the interest is improved.

(Means 13 for Feature 027SH)
The gaming machines of the above means 1 to 9 can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and include a disadvantage setting value and an advantageous setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantage setting value. Any of the set values can be set (see, for example, FIGS. 11-2 (A) and 11-2 (B)), the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed. May be different from the advance notice effect and the specific display. For example, the set value may be suggested by the effect mode (for example, the background) of the super reach effect, or the set value may be suggested by the start effect (fanfare effect) of the jackpot game state.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated and suppress the deterioration of the interest. If the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are related, the effect may become complicated and the interest may be lowered. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, the advance notice effect, the item image effect, and the setting suggestion effect are produced. Because it is independent of, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Explanation of feature unit 006SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 006SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 006SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The production execution means include various effects (for example, various notice effects, present notice effects, which will be described later).
Setting suggestion effect, etc.) can be executed.

The front view and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH (see FIG. 11-1). However, for convenience of explanation, the feature unit 027SH
The movable body 027SH32 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above is referred to as a movable body 006SH 32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is shown in FIG. 11-2 (
This is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH shown in A). The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is shown in FIG.
Big hit probability of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature unit 027SH shown in -2 (B) (high probability state)
Is similar to. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH may be provided with a small hit like the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH, but in the following description, the pachinko game machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH may be provided. Will be described as assuming that no small hit is provided.

The type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH is shown in FIG. 11-.
This is the same as the type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH shown in 2 (C). The distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH is the same as the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and 11-2 (E).

The content of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH is the fluctuation pattern # 1.
Feature 0 shown in FIG. 11-3 (A), except that 5 (small hit variation pattern) does not exist.
This is the same as the content of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 27SH. Feature part 006SH
The determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above is the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 027SH shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), except for the portion related to the fluctuation pattern # 15 (variation pattern of small hits). It is the same as the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of.

FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the advance notice effect. FIG. 12-2 is an example of the advance notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH can execute a plurality of types of advance notice effects as shown in FIG. 12-1. In this embodiment, each of the plurality of types of advance notice effects can be specified by the advance notice effect patterns.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the feature unit 006S
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to H relates to a weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI as shown in FIG. 11-5 (A) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A1” (for convenience of explanation, it relates to the feature unit 006SH). In the explanation of pachinko game machine 1, weak cut-in image 006SHYK
E-JCI) is displayed. When the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" and the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" described later are not distinguished (or collectively), they are referred to as the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A".

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the cut-in notice effect (display of a strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the feature unit 006S
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to H relates to a strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI as shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-A2” (for convenience of explanation, it relates to the feature unit 006SH). In the explanation of pachinko game machine 1, strong cut-in image 006SHYK
E-KCI) is displayed.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the group notice effect (display of the group image) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a group image 027SHYKE-GN (for convenience of explanation, the feature unit) as shown in FIG. 11-5 (C) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern “YEP-B”. In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 006SH, a group image (referred to as 006SHYKE-GN) is displayed.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-C1” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the button advance notice effect (display of button image → press → weak cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. In other words
The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a button image 027SHYKE-BU as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (A) and 11-6 (B) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1".
(For convenience of explanation, the button image 006 is described in the explanation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH.
A weak cut-in image 027SHYKE-JCI (weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI) is displayed (referred to as SHYKE-BU). The weak cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the weak cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect. If the notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" and the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" described later are not distinguished (or collectively), the notice effect pattern "YE"
It is called "PC".

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-C2” shown in FIG. 12-1 is the button advance notice effect (display of button image → press → strong cut-in image) shown in FIG. 11-4. In other words
The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a button image 027SHYKE-BU as shown in FIGS. 11-6 (C) and 11-6 (D) as a notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-C2".
(Button image 006SHYKE-BU), strong cut-in image 027SHYKE-KCI (button image 006SHYKE-KCI)
The strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI) is displayed. The strong cut-in image displayed in the button notice effect may be different from the strong cut-in image displayed in the cut-in notice effect.

The advance notice effect of the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-D" shown in FIG. 12-1 is the accessory advance notice effect (operation of the accessory) shown in FIG. 11-4. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has FIGS. 11-6 (E) (F) (F) (F)
As shown in G), the movable body 027SH32 (movable body 006SH32) is operated.

The notice effect of the notice effect pattern "YEP-E" shown in FIG. 12-1 is a pseudo-continuous notice effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH has a notice production pattern "YEP-E".
As the advance notice effect of, for example, a pseudo continuous advance notice effect as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A), (B), and (C) is executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A), (B), and (C), the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is stopped (temporarily stopped) as the middle symbol (the symbol corresponding to the symbol display area 5C), and then again. , The middle symbol is re-variablely displayed.

Note that FIGS. 12-2 (D), (E), and (F) relate to other notice effects (development notice effects), which will be described in detail later. In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH.
As a notice effect, the notice effect patterns "YEP-A" to "YEP-" shown in FIG. 12-1.
It will be described as assuming that the advance notice effect of "E" can be executed.

12-3 and 12-4 are explanatory views for explaining the determination ratio of the advance notice effect and the like.
FIG. 12-3 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect (display of a weak cut-in image or display of a strong cut-in image). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), when the normal reach is deviated (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution is set to 1.
It is decided at a rate of 0%, and if it is out of super reach (if it becomes either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), it is decided at a rate of 20% that there is execution, and if it is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern #) When it becomes 16, the execution existence is determined at a rate of 30%, and when it becomes a super reach jackpot (when it becomes either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution existence is determined at a rate of 30%. .. If it does not reach (variation patterns # 10, #
In the case of any of 11), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed). The ratio of determining whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of whether or not to execute other notice effects.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the cut-in notice effect, the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1”, “YEP-A” related to the cut-in notice effect).
2 ”) is decided. FIG. 12-3 (B) shows the notice effect patterns (“YEP-A1” and “YEP-A2”) of the cut-in notice effect when it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect.
) Is an example of the determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), in the case of normal reach loss, the notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 100%, and the notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" is set to 0%. Determined by the ratio of. If the super reach is out of order, the notice production pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 80%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-A1" is determined.
"YEP-A2" is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of a normal reach jackpot, the notice production pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-A" is determined.
2 ”is determined at a rate of 50%. In the case of a super reach jackpot, the notice production pattern "YEP-A1" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-A2" is 80.
Determined at a rate of%. The determination ratio of the notice effect pattern of the cut-in notice effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). The same applies to the determination ratio of the advance notice effect pattern of other advance notice effects.

FIG. 12-3 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the group notice effect (display of the group image). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the group advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-B"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH will be used for the group advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the group advance notice effect. The notice effect pattern "YEP-B" is determined as the notice effect pattern.

FIG. 12-3 (D) shows the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the button notice effect (display of button image → press → display of weak cut-in image, or display of button image → press → display of strong cut-in image). This is an example. FIG. 12-3 (E) is an example of the determination ratio of the advance notice effect patterns (“YEP-C1” and “YEP-C2”) related to the button advance notice effect when it is decided to execute the button advance notice effect.

FIG. 12-4 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the bonus notice effect (movement of the bonus). Since there is only one type of advance notice effect pattern related to the character advance notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-D"), the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the character advance notice effect. Notice production pattern "YEP-D" as a notice effect pattern related to the notice effect
To decide.

FIG. 12-4 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the pseudo-continuous notice effect is executed. Since there is only one type of notice effect pattern related to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (notice effect pattern "YEP-E"),
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the pseudo-continuous notice effect, it determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-E" as the advance notice effect pattern related to the pseudo-continuous notice effect.

12-5 and 12-6 are explanatory views for explaining the present box effect and the like. The present box effect is an image of an unopened present box (for example, FIG. 12).
After displaying the present box image 006SHPB-CL of -5 (A), the present box image opened after displaying (for example, the present box image 006SH of FIG. 12-5 (B)).
It is an effect of displaying (PB-OP) (that is, opening a present box). In this embodiment, when the present box is opened (when the opened present box image is displayed), any of the advance notice effects shown in FIG. 12-3 (E) is executed. There are multiple types of present box effect patterns depending on the type of advance notice effect that is executed when the present box is opened (that is, which advance notice effect is executed can be specified by the present box effect pattern. Is). It should be noted that FIGS. 12-5 (C) to 12-5.
Since (J) relates to another example, the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), the present box production pattern “PBP-A” is
It is a present box production in which a cut-in notice production is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (A), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) and the like). The item image A of the machine 1 without the "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the cut-in notice effect is executed.

The present box production pattern "PBP-B" is shown in FIG. 12-6 (B).
It is a present box production in which a group notice production is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (B), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the group notice effect (for example, FIG. 11).
Item image B of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH shown in -9 (D) or the like without the “level” display) is displayed, and the group notice effect is executed.

The present box production pattern "PBP-C" is shown in FIG. 12-6 (C).
It is a present box production in which a button notice production is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (C), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the button notice effect (for example, the pachinko gaming machine according to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (G) and the like). Item image C of 1 without "level" display, etc.) is displayed, and the button notice effect is executed.

The present box production pattern "PBP-D" is shown in FIG. 12-6 (D).
It is a present box production in which the character notice production is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), when the present box is opened, the item image corresponding to the character advance notice effect (for example, the pachinko game related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIG. 11-9 (J) and the like). Item image D of machine 1
, Etc. without "level" display) is displayed, and the character advance notice effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), the present box production pattern “PBP-E” is
It is a present box production in which a pseudo-ream notice production is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), when the present box is opened, an item image corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (for example, an item image displayed as "re") is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous notice effect is displayed. Will be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 12-5 (A), 12-6 (A) to 12-6 (E), an unopened present box image (present box image 006SHPB-CL), an open present box The image (present box image 006SHPB-OP) is common regardless of the present box effect pattern. That is, the player does not know which advance notice effect will be executed before the present box is opened in the present box effect.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of whether or not the present box effect is executed. FIG. 12-7 (A) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-A”) targeting (targeting) the execution of the cut-in notice effect when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. This is an example of the determination rate of whether or not to execute. Figure 1
According to 2-7 (A), if it is out of order, the present box effect (PBP-A) is decided at a rate of 15%, and if it is a big hit, the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed.
-A) is determined at a rate of 90%. If the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-A)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit when the present box effect (PBP-A) corresponding to the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is not executed before the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. That is, for example, according to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), in the case of an outlier, the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A) is not accompanied by the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A). While YEP-A) is executed, in the case of a big hit, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A) in most cases (90%). Therefore, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed with the execution of the present box effect (PBP-A), the cut is performed without executing the present box effect (PBP-A). It is more likely to be a big hit than when the in-notice effect (YEP-A) is executed.

FIG. 12-7 (B) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “PBP-”) for executing the group advance notice effect when the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed.
This is an example of the determination rate of whether or not B ") is executed. According to FIG. 12-7 (B), the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed at a rate of 25% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 90%. If the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the present box effect (P)
It is determined at a rate of 0% whether or not BP-B) is executed (when the group notice effect (YEP-B) is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-B) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A), before the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. When the present box effect (PBP-B) corresponding to the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed, the group notice effect (YEP-B) is supported before the group notice effect (YEP-B) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-B) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7 (C) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “present box effect pattern”) for executing the button advance notice effect when the button advance notice effect (YEP-C) is executed.
This is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not PBP-C ”) is executed. According to FIG. 12-7 (C), the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed at a rate of 10% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 60%. If the button notice effect (YEP-C) is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed at a rate of 0% (button notice effect (YEP-C)).
) Is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-C) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), before the button advance notice effect (YEP-C) is executed, as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-C) corresponding to the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed, the button advance effect (YEP) is performed before the button advance effect (YEP-C) is executed.
It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-C) corresponding to -C) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7 (D) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “PB”) for executing the character advance notice effect when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed.
This is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute "PD"). According to FIG. 12-7 (D), the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined to be executed at a rate of 5% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 80%. If the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 0% (when the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is not executed). Does not perform present box production (PBP-D)).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is similar to the relationship between the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed before, the character advance notice effect (YEP) is performed before the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is executed. It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-D) corresponding to −D) is not executed.

FIG. 12-7 (E) shows a present box effect (present box effect pattern “present box effect pattern”) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect when the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed.
This is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not PBP-E) is executed. According to FIG. 12-7 (E), the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined to be executed at a rate of 25% in the case of a loss, and the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined in the case of a big hit. ) Is executed at a rate of 60%. If the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is not executed, the presence or absence of the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined at a rate of 0% (pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E)).
) Is not executed, the present box effect (PBP-E) is not executed).

According to the example shown in FIG. 12-7 (E), the pseudo continuous advance notice effect (YEP-E) is executed as in the relationship between the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the present box effect (PBP-A). When the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed before, the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP) is executed before the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is executed.
It is more likely to be a big hit than when the present box effect (PBP-E) corresponding to −E) is not executed.

FIG. 12-8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting suggestion effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 006SH can execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) displays, for example, the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU as shown in FIG. 12-8 (B). It is a hot character production. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-9, the thermal character effect suggests a set value when it is out of order, but does not suggest a set value when it is a big hit.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-EYE1” shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is, for example, an eye-catching image 00 which is a normal mode as shown in FIG. 12-8 (C).
This is a normal eye-catching effect that displays 6SHSEP-EYE1. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 shown in FIG. 12-8 (C), the character's yukata is plain. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-10, the normal eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is off (when either the fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14 is achieved), and the special eye-catching effect (described later) is increased. Not, but suggests a setting.

The setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-EYE2” shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is, for example, an eye-catching image 00 which is a special aspect as shown in FIG. 12-8 (D).
This is a special eye-catching effect that displays 6SHSEP-EYE2. In the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), the character's yukata has a goldfish pattern. As will be described with reference to FIG. 12-10, the special eye-catching effect is executed when the super reach is lost (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14 is obtained), and the set value is suggested. In addition, SEP-EYE1 (normally eye-catching effect) and SEP-EYE2 (normally eye-catching effect)
When it is not distinguished (or collectively) from the special eye-catching effect, it is called SEP-EYE (eye-catching effect).

The eye-catching image (eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1, eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2) is an image displayed when the normal background (non-reach background) is switched from the effect background during reach.

FIG. 12-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect (setting suggestion effect pattern “SEP-ATU”). FIG. 12-9 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the thermal character effect when the set value is 1 to 5. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), when the normal reach is deviated (when the fluctuation pattern # 12 is obtained), execution is set to 1.
It is determined at a rate of%, and if Super Reach A is out of order (fluctuation pattern # 13), execution is determined at a rate of 2%, and if Super Reach B is out of order (fluctuation pattern # 14). In the case of), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 2%, and in the case of a normal reach jackpot (when the fluctuation pattern is # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A jackpot (case). In the case of fluctuation pattern # 17), the percentage of execution is determined at a rate of 60%, and in the case of a super reach B jackpot (in the case of fluctuation pattern # 18), the percentage of execution is determined. If it does not reach (variation patterns # 10, # 1)
(If any of 1), determine whether or not to execute at a rate of 0% (determine not to execute)
..

FIG. 12-9 (B) shows the thermal character effect (setting suggestion effect pattern “) when the set value is 6.
This is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not to execute "SEP-ATU"). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-9 (B), when the normal reach is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern is # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 5%, and when the super reach A is out of order (variation). In the case of pattern # 13), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and in the case of a deviation from Super Reach B (in the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and normal reach In the case of a big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach A big hit (when it becomes a fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution existence is 60%. It is decided by the ratio, and when it becomes a super reach B big hit (when it becomes the fluctuation pattern # 18), the execution presence is decided at the ratio of 70%. If it does not reach (fluctuation pattern # 10)
, # 11), the execution status is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed).

According to FIGS. 12-9 (A) and 12-9 (B), the hot character effect is an effect with a relatively high expectation of a big hit (an effect in which the decision rate of execution is relatively small in the case of a loss). is there.
More specifically, the jackpot expectation of the thermal character effect when the set value is 1 to 5 is higher than the jackpot expectation of the thermal character effect when the set value is 6 (the thermal character in the case of a loss). The determination rate of whether or not the effect is executed is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6).

The determination rate of whether or not the thermal character effect is executed in the case of a loss is lower when the set value is 1 to 5 than when the set value is 6 (that is, when the set value is 6). (Because the setting value is higher than when the setting value is 1 to 5), the heat character effect is executed, and the frequency of loss is 1 to 1 when the setting value is 6. It is higher than when it is 5 (specifically, when focusing on the same type of reach, when the set value is 6, it is 5 times higher than when the set value is 1 to 5). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6, depending on the frequency with which the heat character effect is executed and the character is out of order. For example, the player was able to perform a hot character production and developed into a super reach,
If you feel that the frequency of deviations as a result is higher than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 5), it is estimated that the set value is 6. Will be possible.

On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the determination rate of whether or not the hot character effect is executed is the same between when the set value is 1 to 5 and when the set value is 6, so that the heat character effect is executed and ,
The frequency of jackpots does not change when the set value is 1 to 5 or when the set value is 6. Therefore, the player cannot infer whether the set value is 1 to 5 or the set value is 6 depending on the frequency with which the hot character effect is executed and the jackpot is hit.

That is, as described above, the thermal character effect suggests a set value when it is out of order.
If it becomes a big hit, the set value is not suggested.

Fig. 12-10 shows an eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect).
It is explanatory drawing explaining the determination ratio such as whether or not the execution of. FIG. 12-10 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of whether or not the eye-catching effect is executed. The determination ratio of whether or not to execute the eye-catching effect is common to the set values 1 to 6 (it does not depend on the set value). According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), when the super reach A is out of order (when the fluctuation pattern # 13 is reached), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 100%, and the super reach B is out of order. (In the case of fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is also determined at a rate of 100%. In cases other than the above (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 10 to # 12 and # 16 to # 18 is obtained), the presence or absence of execution is determined at a rate of 0% (determined not to be executed). That is, as described above, the eye-catching effect (normal eye-catching effect, special eye-catching effect) is executed when the super reach is out of alignment (when any of the fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 14 is achieved).

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 006SH decides to execute the eye-catching effect, the setting suggestion effect pattern (“SEP-EYE1”, “SEP-” related to the eye-catching effect).
EYE2 ") is determined. FIG. 12-10 (B) shows a setting suggestion effect pattern (“SEP-EYE”) when it is determined to execute the eye-catching effect when the set value is 1-3.
1 ”and“ SEP-EYE2 ”) are examples of determination ratios. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (B), when the super reach A is out of alignment, the normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is determined at a ratio of 90%, and the special eye is determined. The catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 10%, and if Super Reach B is out of the range, the normal eye catch effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1") is determined.
”) Is determined at a rate of 95%, and a special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern“ SEP-
EYE2 ") is determined at a rate of 5%.

12-10 (C) shows the setting suggestion effect patterns (“SEP-EYE1” and “SEP-EYE2”) when it is determined to execute the eye-catching effect when the set values are 4 to 6.
") Is an example of the determination ratio. According to the example shown in FIG. 12-10 (C), Super Reach A
If it is out of the way, it is usually an eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE".
1 ”) is determined at a rate of 60%, and a special eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern“ SEP
-EYE2 ") is determined at a rate of 40%, and if Super Reach B is out of order, a normal eye-catching effect (setting suggestion effect pattern" SEP-EYE1 ") is determined at a rate of 60%, and a special eye-catching effect is determined. The effect (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") is determined at a rate of 40%.

Special eye-catching effect when Super Reach A is off (setting suggestion effect pattern "
The determination ratio of "SEP-EYE2") is 1 to 3 when the set value is 4 to 6.
Since it is higher than when (Specifically, when the set value is 4 to 6, it is four times higher than when the set value is 1 to 3). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach A is out of alignment and the special eye-catching effect is executed. .. For example, the player is out of Super Reach A and
If you feel that the special eye-catching effect is executed more frequently than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 3), the set value is 4 to 6. It becomes possible to guess.

Special eye-catching effect when Super Reach B is off (setting suggestion effect pattern "
The determination ratio of "SEP-EYE2") is 1 to 3 when the set value is 4 to 6.
Since it is higher than when, Super Reach B is out of order, and the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed is higher when the set value is 4 to 6 than when the set value is 1 to 3. (Specifically, when the set value is 4 to 6, it is 8 times higher than when the set value is 1 to 3). Therefore, the player can infer whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 depending on the frequency with which the super reach B is out of alignment and the special eye-catching effect is executed. .. For example, the player is out of Super Reach B and
If you feel that the special eye-catching effect is executed more frequently than usual (usually the set value is one of 1 to 3), the set value is 4 to 6. It becomes possible to guess.

The difference in the frequency with which the special eye-catching effect is executed depending on whether the set value is 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is out of Super Reach A, and the special eye-catching effect is executed. The player is out of Super Reach A because it is out of Super Reach B and the case where the special eye-catching effect is executed is larger than the case (the former is 4 times difference, the latter is 8 times difference). And more than the frequency with which special eye-catching effects were performed
It is easier to be confident in estimating the set value by yourself if it is out of Super Reach B and the frequency at which the special eye-catching effect is executed. As an example, consider a case in which there are a total of two fluctuations that have evolved into Super Reach A and have become out of order, and both times were special eye-catching effects. In this case, when the set value is 1-3. 1% (10%)
× 10%. The denominator occurs at the rate of the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), while there were a total of two fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach B and became out of order, both times. Considering the case that was a special eye-catching effect, the set value of this case is 1 to 1.
Because it occurs only at a rate of 0.25% (5% x 5%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order) when it was 3, (that is, it evolved into Super Reach A). As a result, there were a total of 2 fluctuations that were missed, and there were a total of 2 fluctuations that were eventually missed as a result of developing into Super Reach B, compared to the case where both were special eye-catching effects. 2 (Because it is easier to deny that the set value is 1 to 3 in the case where it was a special eye-catching effect both times), there are a total of 2 fluctuations that developed into Super Reach B and eventually became out of order. 2
In the case where the special eye-catching effect was performed both times, it is easier to be confident in estimating the set value (estimating that the set value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3).

If the special eye-catching effect is not executed at the out-of-super reach, the normal eye-catching effect is executed (see FIGS. 12-10 (B) and 12 (C)). , Is synonymous with non-execution of special eye-catching production at the out of super reach. Therefore, although not as much as the suggestion by the special eye-catching effect, the set value is also suggested by the normal eye-catching effect. As an example, considering a case in which there are a total of two fluctuations that have evolved into Super Reach A and are eventually out of order, and both of them are normal eye-catching effects, the set value is 1 to 3 in this case. It occurs at a rate of 81% (90% x 90%. The denominator is the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and 36% (60%) when the set value is 4 to 6. × 60%. Since the denominator is generated at the ratio of the number of fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), even if the set value is estimated, it seems to be a relatively uncertain estimation. On the other hand, considering the case where there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order, and both were special eye-catching effects, this case is when the set value is 1-3. 1% (10% x 10%)
.. The denominator is generated at the rate of the number of fluctuations that evolved into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order), and 24% (40% x 40%. The denominator evolved into Super Reach A) when the set value is 4 to 6. As a result, it occurs at the rate of the number of fluctuations), so even if it is estimated that the set value is 4 to 6 instead of 1 to 3, it seems to be a relatively reasonable estimation. In other words, there were a total of two fluctuations that developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order, and compared to the case where both times were normal eye-catching productions, it developed into Super Reach A and eventually became out of order. It is easier to estimate the set value in the case where there are a total of two fluctuations and both times are special eye-catching effects.

FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various timings. Specifically, FIG. 12-1
1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display that becomes the super reach.

In FIG. 12-11, T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 is the timing at which the present box image (the unopened present box image 006SHPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A)) is displayed when the present box effect is executed. In T1, when executing a plurality of present box effects corresponding to each of the plurality of notice effects, a plurality of present box images (present box image 006S) are used.
HPB-CL) is displayed. For example, a present box effect (PBP-A) targeting (targeting) execution of a cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and a group notice effect (YEP-A).
When executing the present box effect (PBP-B) for the execution of B),
Two present box images (present box image 006SHPB-CL) are displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed. In other words, T3 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T4 is the timing to start the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A). T5
Is the timing to end the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A). That is, T
4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A).

T6 is a present box production (PB) for the execution of the group notice production (YEP-B).
When BP) is executed, it is the opening timing of one present box image. In other words, T6 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T7 is the timing to start the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). T8 is the timing to end the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). That is, T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a present box production (YEP-E) for the execution of a pseudo-ream notice production (YEP-E).
When PBP-E) is executed, it is the opening timing of one present box image. In other words, T9 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T10 is the timing at which the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is started. T13
Is the timing to end the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). That is, T10
~ T13 is an execution period of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E).

T11 is the timing to start the execution of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T12
Is the timing to end the execution of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). That is, T11
~ T12 is the execution period of the heat character production (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is the opening timing of one present box image when the present box effect (PBP-C) for executing the button notice effect (YEP-C) is executed. In other words, T15 changes one of the unopened present box image 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T16 is the timing to start the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C). T17
Is the timing to end the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C). That is, T17
~ T18 is an execution period of the button notice effect (YEP-C).

T18 is a present box production (YEP-D) for the execution of the character advance notice production (YEP-D).
When PBP-D) is executed, it is the opening timing of one present box image. In other words, T18 changes one of the unopened present box images 006SHPPB-CL shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) to the open present box image 006SHPB-OP shown in FIG. 12-5 (B). It is the timing to make it.

T19 is the timing to start the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). T20 is the timing at which the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) is finished. That is, T19 to T
20 is an execution period of the character advance notice production (YEP-D).

Ta21 to Ta22 are the out-of-print symbol stop display periods in the case of out-of-order.
Ta22 to Ta23 are execution periods of the eye-catching effect. Tb21 to Tb23 are jackpot symbol stop display periods in the case of a jackpot.

12-12 to 12-14 are specific examples of various timings. Figure 12-12 (A
), The fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed, and the present box effect (PBP) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1) is executed. -A) shows various timings when it is executed. The setting suggestion effect (heat character effect, eye-catching effect) is not executed.

In FIG. 12-12 (A), T1 is one present box image 006SHPB.
-This is the timing when CL is displayed. In other words, in T1, the cut-in notice production (YEP)
The present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) for the execution of −A1) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A1).

In FIG. 12-12 (B), the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16).
Therefore, the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group notice effect (YEP-B), and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the group notice effect (YEP-B) is targeted for execution. When the present box effect (PBP-B) and the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (SEP-ATU) is executed. It shows various timings of.

In FIG. 12-12 (B), T1 has two present box images 006SHPB.
-This is the timing when CL is displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 00 of the present box effect (PBP-B) for executing the group notice effect (YEP-B).
6SHPB-CL, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is displayed. T
2 is the timing of reaching.

T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2). That is, the present box production (PBP-A) is not performed (present box image 006SHP).
(Without changing the B-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP)
, Cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is executed.

T6 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU).

In FIG. 12-13, the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the button notice effect (YEP-C1) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the button notice effect (YEP) is executed. -Present box production (PBP-C) for the execution of C1)
) And a present box production (PBP) for the execution of the pseudo-ream notice production (YEP-E)
-E) is executed, and a hot character production (SEP-ATU) and a special eye-catching production (SEP-
It shows various timings when EYE2) and are executed.

In FIG. 12-13, T1 is two present box images 006SHPB-CL.
Is the timing to be displayed. That is, in T1, the present box image 00 of the present box effect (PBP-C) for executing the button notice effect (YEP-C1).
6SHPB-CL, the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) for executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is displayed. T
2 is the timing of reaching.

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C1). Ta21 to Ta22 are outlier symbol stop display periods. Ta22 to Ta23 are execution periods of the special eye-catching effect.

In FIG. 12-14, the fluctuation pattern is a super reach B jackpot (variation pattern # 18), and the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), and the button advance notice effect (YEP-C2). The character notice effect (YEP-D) and the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the present box effect (PBP-A) and the group notice for the execution of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) are executed. Present box effect (PBP-B) for execution of effect (YEP-B), present box effect (PBP-C) for execution of button advance notice effect (YEP-C2), and character advance notice effect (YEP) The present box effect (PBP-D) for the execution of −D) and the present box effect (PBP-E) for the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) are executed, and the hot character effect (PBP-E) is executed. It shows various timings when SEP-ATU) is executed.

In FIG. 12-14, T1 is a five present box image 006SHPB-CL.
Is the timing to be displayed. That is, in T1, the cut-in notice production (YEP-A2)
) Present box effect (PBP-A) present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box effect (PBP-B) present box image 006SHPB targeting the execution of group notice effect (YEP-B) -CL, present box for the execution of the button notice effect (YEP-C2) Present box image of the present box effect (PBP-C) 006SHPB-CL, present box for the execution of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D) Present box image of production (PBP-D) 006SHPB-CL
, Present box production (PBP-) for the execution of pseudo-ream notice production (YEP-E)
The present box image 006SHPB-CL of E) is displayed. T2 is the timing to reach.

T3 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-A) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T4 to T5 are execution periods of the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2).

T6 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-B) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T7 to T8 are execution periods of the group notice effect (YEP-B).

T9 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-E) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T10 to T13 are execution periods of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). T11 to T12 are execution periods of the thermal character effect (SEP-ATU). T14 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T15 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-C) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T17 to T18 are execution periods of the button notice effect (YEP-C2).

T19 is a timing for changing the present box image 006SHPB-CL of the present box effect (PBP-D) displayed in T1 to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. T19 to T20 are execution periods of the character advance notice effect (YEP-D). Tb21 to Tb22 are jackpot symbol stop display periods.

(Direction decision process A (decision about notice production and present box production)
12-15 to 12-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the effect determination process A executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9. The flowchart of FIG. 12-16 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 12-15. The flowchart of FIG. 12-17 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 12-16.

In the effect determination process A shown in FIG. 12-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS100).
.. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (A), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0% if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11). However, if the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13,
If it is any of # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 20%, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%, and the fluctuation pattern is super reach. If it is a big hit (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%.

Following step 006SHS100, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS101). When it is decided that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; YES),
Step 006 SHS 102. If it is not determined that the cut-in notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS101; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS101 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of cut-in advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS102). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), the effect control CP
If the fluctuation pattern of the U120 is out of the normal reach, the notice production pattern "YEP"
-A1 "is determined at 100%, and the notice effect pattern" YEP-A2 "is determined at 0%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 80%, and sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A2" to 2.
Determined at 0%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50%, and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 50%.
"YEP-A2" is determined at 50%. Further, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-A1" at 20%.
The notice production pattern "YEP-A2" is determined at 80%.

Following step 006SHS102, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 006S.
Notice production pattern of cut-in notice production determined by HS102 (Notice production pattern "Y"
Set "EP-A1" or notice effect pattern "YEP-A2") (step 006SH)
S103).

Following step 006SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (target) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS104). For example, FIG.
As shown in -7 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is an out-of-order fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-A) is executed at a rate of 15%, and the variation pattern is determined. If it is a big hit fluctuation pattern, present box production (PBP-A)
) Is executed at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SH104, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-A) is determined to be executed (step 006SH).
S105). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-A) is to be executed (step 006SHS105; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS106. When it is not decided that the present box production (PBP-A) is executed (step 006SH)
S105; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS110.

Following step 006SHS105 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-A” (step 006SHS106).

Step 006SHS101 (NO), Step 006SHS105 (NO), or
Following step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS110). For example, FIG.
As shown in -3 (C), in the effect control CPU 120, the fluctuation pattern is non-reachable (
If the fluctuation pattern is either # 10 or # 11, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 2%. The fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14)
If so, the execution presence is determined at a rate of 30%, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (variation pattern # 17). , # 18), the percentage of execution is determined at a rate of 50%.

Following step 006SHS110, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS111). If it is determined that the group notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS111; YES), step 006S
Proceed to HS113. When it is not decided that there is execution for the group notice production (step 006S)
HS111; NO), proceed to step 006SHS120 of FIG. 12-16.

Following step 006SHS111 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-B” for the group advance notice effect (step 006SHS113).

Following step 006SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 uses a present box effect (PBP) targeting (targeting) the execution of the group notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern.
-B) is determined whether or not to be executed (step 006SHS114). For example, FIG. 12-7 (B)
), The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the present box effect (PBP-B) is executed at a rate of 25% if the variation pattern is out of the range, and the variation pattern is a jackpot variation pattern. If so, the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed at a rate of 90%.

Following step 006SH114, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-B) is determined to be executed (step 006SH).
S115). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-B) is to be executed (step 006SHS115; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS116. When it is not decided that the present box production (PBP-B) is executed (step 006SH)
S115; NO), proceed to step 006SHS120 of FIG. 12-16.

Following step 006SHS115 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-B” (step 006SHS116).

Step 006SHS101 (NO) in FIG. 12-15, step 006SHS105 (
NO) or, following step 006SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the button advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 00 in FIG. 12-16).
6SHS120). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0% if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11). However, the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (fluctuation pattern # 12)
), The execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the execution presence is determined at a ratio of 25%, and the fluctuation pattern is If it is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), the percentage of execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the percentage of execution is 50%. To decide with.

Following step 006SHS120, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the button advance notice effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS121). If it is determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS122. If it is not determined that the button notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS121; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS121 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of button advance notice effect (that is, the advance notice effect pattern) based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS122). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (E), the effect control CPU 1
20 is a notice production pattern "YEP-C" if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach.
"1" is determined at 90%, and the notice production pattern "YEP-C2" is determined at 10%. Also,
If the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C1" at 10%, and determines the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C2" at 90%.
To decide with.

Following step 006SHS122, the effect control CPU 120 is set in step 006S.
Notice production pattern of button notice production determined by HS122 (Notice production pattern "YEP"
-C1 "or the advance notice effect pattern" YEP-C2 ") is set (step 006SHS1).
23).

Following step 006SHS123, the effect control CPU 120 has a present box effect (P) that targets (targets) the execution of the button notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern.
Whether or not BP-C) is executed is determined (step 006SHS124). For example, FIG. 12-7
As shown in (C), if the fluctuation pattern is out of alignment, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is executed at a rate of 10%, and the variation pattern is a big hit. If it is a fluctuating pattern, it is determined at a rate of 60% whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is executed.

Following step 006SHS124, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-C) is determined to be executed (step 006SH).
S125). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-C) is to be executed (step 006SHS125; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS126. When it is not decided that the present box production (PBP-C) is executed (step 006SH)
S125; NO), the process proceeds to step 006SHS130.

Following step 006SHS125 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-C” (step 006SHS126).

Step 006SHS121 (NO), Step 006SHS125 (NO), or
Following step 006SHS126, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS130). For example, FIG.
As shown in 2-4 (A), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0% and fluctuations. If the pattern is out of normal reach (fluctuation pattern # 12), execution is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the variation pattern is out of super reach (variation pattern # 13 or # 14), execution is 5%. If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18). If there is, it is decided at a rate of 75%.

Following step 006SHS130, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the accessory advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131). If it is determined that the character advance notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS131; YES), step 00
Proceed to 6SHS133. When it is not decided that there is execution for the character advance notice production (step 0)
06SHS131; NO), proceed to step 006SHS140 in FIG. 12-17.

Following step 006SHS131 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern "YEP-C" of the accessory advance notice effect (step 006SHS133).

Following step 006SHS133, the effect control CPU 120 uses a present box effect (PB) for executing the character advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern.
It is determined whether or not PD) is executed (step 006SHS134). For example, FIG. 12-7 (
As shown in D), if the fluctuation pattern is a deviation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-D) is executed at a rate of 5%, and the variation pattern is a jackpot variation. If it is a pattern, the presence or absence of execution of the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined at a rate of 80%.

Following step 006SHS134, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-D) is determined to be executed (step 006SH).
S135). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-D) is to be executed (step 006SHS135; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS136. When it is not decided that the present box production (PBP-D) is executed (step 006SH)
S135; NO), proceed to step 006SHS140 of FIG. 12-17.

Following step 006SHS135 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-D” (step 006SHS136).

Step 006SHS131 (NO), Step 006SHS135 (NO) in FIGS. 12-16
NO) or, following step 006SHS136, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pseudo continuous advance notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 00 in FIG. 12-17).
6SHS140). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either fluctuation pattern # 10 or # 11), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution is performed at a rate of 0%. However, the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (fluctuation pattern # 12)
), The execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (either fluctuation pattern # 13 or # 14), the execution presence is determined at a ratio of 50%, and the fluctuation pattern is If it is a normal reach jackpot (variation pattern # 16), the percentage of execution is determined at a rate of 25%, and if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach jackpot (either fluctuation pattern # 17 or # 18), the percentage of execution is 60%. To decide with.

Following step 006SHS140, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect is executed (step 006SHS141). If it is determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS143. If it is not determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed (step 006SHS141; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS141 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the advance notice effect pattern “YEP-E” for the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect (step 006SHS143).
..

Following step 006SHS143, the effect control CPU 120 has a present box effect (P) that targets (targets) the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect based on the fluctuation pattern.
Whether or not BP-E) is executed is determined (step 006SHS144). For example, FIG. 12-7
As shown in (E), if the fluctuation pattern is out of the fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is executed at a rate of 25%, and the variation pattern is a big hit. If it is a fluctuating pattern, it is determined at a rate of 60% whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is executed.

Following step 006SHS144, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present box effect (PBP-E) is determined to be executed (step 006SH).
S145). If it is determined that the present box effect (PBP-E) is to be executed (step 006SHS145; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS146. When it is not decided that the present box production (PBP-E) is executed (step 006SH)
S145; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS145 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the present box effect pattern “PBP-E” (step 006SHS146).
Then, this flowchart ends.

(Direction determination process B (Decision about setting suggestion effect)
FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process B executed in the variable display start setting process of S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. It should be noted that which of the effect determination process A described with reference to FIGS. 12-15 to 12-17 and the effect determination process B described with reference to FIG. 12-18 is executed first in the variable display start setting process (S171). You may.

In the effect determination process B shown in FIG. 12-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the thermal character effect based on the current set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 006SH).
S200). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any one of 1 to 5, the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (variation patterns # 10, #) as shown in FIG. 12-9 (A). If it is any of 11), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 0%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (variation pattern # 12), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 1%, and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A. If it is out of order (fluctuation pattern # 13), it is determined that there is execution at a rate of 2%, and if the variation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), it is determined that there is execution at a rate of 2%. Is a normal reach jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 16)
), The execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, if the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 17), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 60%, and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach B jackpot (variation). If it is pattern # 18), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is 6, the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (either of the fluctuation patterns # 10 and # 11) as shown in FIG. 12-9 (B). If so, the execution status is determined at a rate of 0%, and the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach (fluctuation pattern #).
If it is 12), it is decided that there is execution at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach A (
If the fluctuation pattern is # 13), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, if the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern # 14), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 10%, and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach. If it is a big hit (fluctuation pattern # 16), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 40%, and if the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A jackpot (variation pattern # 17), the execution presence is determined at a rate of 60%. Super reach B jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 18)
If so, the execution status is determined at a rate of 70%.

Following step 006SHS200, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined that the thermal character effect is executed (step 006SHS201). If it is determined that the thermal character effect is to be executed (step 006SHS201; YES), step 006S
Proceed to HS203. When it is not decided that there is execution for the thermal character production (step 006S)
HS201; NO), proceed to step 006SHS210.

Following step 006SHS201 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-ATU" for the thermal character effect (step 006SHS20).
3).

Following step 006SHS201 (NO) or step 006SHS203,
The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the eye-catching effect based on the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS210). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (A), in the effect control CPU 120, the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach (variation patterns # 13, #
If it is 14), the existence of execution is determined at a rate of 100%, and if not, the existence of execution is determined at a rate of 0%.

Following step 006SHS210, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the eye-catching effect is determined to be executed (step 006SHS211). If it is determined that the eye-catching effect is to be executed (step 006SHS211; YES), the process proceeds to step 006SHS212. If it is not determined that the eye-catching effect is to be executed (step 006SHS211; NO), this flowchart ends.

Following step 006SHS211 (YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of eye-catching effect (that is, the setting suggestion effect pattern) based on the current set value and the fluctuation pattern (step 006SHS212). For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any of 1 to 3, as shown in FIG. 12-10 (B),
If the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach A (fluctuation pattern # 13), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 90%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (SEP-EYE2) ( "Special eye-catching effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and if the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (variation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is 95%. Determined by the ratio of
The setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the effect control CPU 120, when the current set value is any of 4 to 6, the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach A (variation pattern # 13) as shown in FIG. 12-10 (C). If so, the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 40%. However, the fluctuation pattern is out of Super Reach B (
If it is the fluctuation pattern # 14), the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1 (normal eye-catching effect)" is determined at a rate of 60%, and the setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2 (special eye-catching effect)" is 40. Determined at a rate of%.

Following step 006SHS212, the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 006S.
Set the setting suggestion effect pattern (setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE1" or setting suggestion effect pattern "SEP-EYE2") of the eye-catching effect determined in HS212 (
Step 006SHS213).

12-19 to 12-22 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 12-19 to 12-22 show the example shown in FIG. 12-12 (B).
The main scenes are shown as an example, FIG. 12-19 (A) → FIG. 12-19 (B) →
FIG. 12-19 (C) → FIG. 12-20 (A) → FIG. 12-20 (B) → FIG. 12-20 (C) →
FIG. 12-21 (A) → FIG. 12-21 (B) → FIG. 12-21 (C) → FIG. 12-22 (A) →
The transition is in the order of FIG. 12-22 (B) → FIG. 12-22 (C). In addition, FIG. 12-19 (A) (
The same applies to other figures. In the other figure, reference numerals are omitted), an active display area 006 SHAHA, which is a display area for active display, and an active display 006 SHAH displayed in the active display area 006 SHAHA are displayed.

FIG. 12-19 (A) is a scene before reaching in the variable display. Figure 12-19
(B) is a scene in which two present box images 006SHPPB-CL are displayed (FIG. 1).
2-12 (B) T1 scene). The two present box images 006SHPB-CL displayed are not distinguished in terms of display mode, but are presents of the present box effect (PBP-B) for the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B). Box image 00
6SHPB-CL, a present box image 006SHPB-CL of a present box effect (PBP-E) for executing a pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E). Figure 12-
19 (C) is a scene that has reached in the variable display.

FIG. 12-20 (A) shows a scene in which the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A2) is performed, that is, a scene in which the strong cut-in image 006SHYKE-KCI is displayed (FIG. 12-12).
(B) scenes T4 to T5).

FIG. 12-20 (B) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene of T6 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). In the scene of FIG. 12-20 (B), the present box image 006SHPB-
Corresponding to the change of CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), the item image corresponding to the group notice production (item image displayed as "group") is displayed. There is.

12-20 (C) shows a scene in which the group advance notice effect (YEP-B) is performed, that is, a scene in which the group image 006SHYKE-GN is displayed (T7 to T8 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). (Scene). The present box image 006SHPB-OP (same for the item image corresponding to the group notice effect) is before the execution of the group notice effect (YEP-B) (for example, immediately before T7).
Will be erased. In addition, the present box image 00, which is deleted when a certain notice effect is executed, is deleted.
The 6SHPB-OP and the item image deletion timing do not have to be before the execution of the notice effect (for example, the execution start timing of the notice effect, any timing during the execution of the notice effect, the execution of the notice effect). It may be the end timing, etc.).

FIG. 12-21 (A) is a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (a scene of T9 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). In the scene of FIG. 12-21 (A), the present box image 006SHPB-
Corresponding to the change of CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), the item image corresponding to the pseudo-continuous notice effect (the item image displayed as "re") is displayed. ing.

12-21 (B) to 12-22 (B) are scenes in which the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) is performed (scenes of T10 to T13 in FIG. 12-12 (B)). In addition, FIG. 12-21
(C) is a scene (T in FIG. 12-12 (B)) in which the thermal character production (SEP-ATU) is performed.
11 to T12 scenes). FIG. 12-22 (C) is a scene in which the jackpot symbol is displayed.

The temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP is displayed in FIGS. 12-21 (B) to 12-22 (A), and the revariable display is performed in FIGS. 12-22 (B). Further, in FIG. 12-21 (C), the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is also displayed in addition to the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP, but the thermal character image 006SHSEP-ATU is on the front side of the temporary stop symbol 006SH-REP. It is displayed. That is, the hot character effect is executed with priority over the pseudo-continuous notice effect. In addition, in FIGS. 12-21 (B) to 12-22 (B), a pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP)
As −E), an example in which “temporary stop → revariable display” is performed once is shown, but a pseudo-continuous notice effect (Y)
As EP-E), "temporary stop-> revariable display" may be performed twice or more.

12-23 to 12-25 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 12-23 to 12-25 show a part of the scenes in the example shown in FIG. 12-13 as an example, and FIG. 12-23 (A) → FIG. 12-. 23 (B) → Fig. 12
-23 (C) → Fig. 12-24 (A) → Fig. 12-24 (B) → Fig. 12-24 (C) → Fig. 12
The transition is in the order of -25 (A) → FIG. 12-25 (B) → FIG. 12-25 (C).

FIG. 12-23 (A) shows the scene immediately before the development into super reach (super reach B) (
The scene immediately before T14 in FIG. 12-13). In the variable display (variable display shown in FIG. 12-13), a present box effect (PBP) for executing two present box images 006SHPB-CL (button notice effect (YEP-C)) is performed on T1. -C) Present box image 006SHPB-CL, Present box image of present box production (PBP-E) for execution of pseudo-continuous notice production (YEP-E) 006SH
PB-CL) is displayed, but in the scene of FIG. 12-23 (A) (the scene immediately before T14),
Since the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) has already been completed (in the scenes of T10 to T13), one present box image 006SHPB-CL (button notice effect (Y))
Only the present box image 006SHPB-CL) of the present box effect (PBP-C) for the execution of EP-C) is displayed.

FIG. 12-23 (B) is a scene developed into super reach (scene of T14 in FIG. 12-13).

FIG. 12-23 (C) shows a scene in which one present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to a present box image 006SHPB-OP (scene of T15 in FIG. 12-13).
Is. In the scene shown in FIG. 12-23 (C), the present box image 006SHPB-CL
Corresponds to the change to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and the item image (item image on which the button image is drawn) corresponding to the button notice effect is displayed.

12-24 (A) and 12-24 (B) show the scene where the button notice effect (YEP-C1) is performed (YEP-C1).
It is the scene of T16 to T17 of FIG. 12-13). In FIG. 12-24 (A), the button image 0
06SHYKE-BU is displayed, and by pressing the button, the weak cut-in image 006SHYKE-JCI is displayed in FIG. 12-24 (A).

FIG. 12-24 (C) is a scene immediately before the outlier symbol is displayed in the super reach (super reach B) (a scene immediately before Ta21 in FIG. 12-13). Figure 12-25 (
A) and (B) are scenes in which the out-of-order symbols are displayed (scenes of Ta21 to Ta22 in FIGS. 12-13). In FIG. 12-25 (A), the small symbol "767" is displayed, and in FIG. 12-25 (B).
Then, the decorative pattern "767" is displayed.

FIG. 12-25 (C) is a scene in which a special eye-catching effect (SEP-EYE2) is performed (scenes of Ta22 to Ta23 in FIGS. 12-13). In FIG. 12-25 (C), an eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 (character image of a yukata with a goldfish pattern), which is a special aspect, is displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (C), the eye-catching image 00
6SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (not shown eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE)
(The same applies during the display of 1), the small symbol "767" can be visually recognized. In addition, FIG. 12-25
The """shown in the four corners of the numbers" 7 "," 6 ", and" 7 "of the small symbol" 767 "in (C) indicate that the small symbol" 767 "is shaking. In addition, instead of or in addition to the small symbol "767" in FIG. 12-25 (C), the small symbol "767" in FIG. 12-25 (A) may also be shaken.

While the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the reach-compatible small symbols (such as the above-mentioned shaking small symbol "767") are not displayed. It may be displayed so that a small symbol (a small symbol that is stopped and displayed by a symbol confirmation command) can be visually recognized at all times.

While the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE2 is being displayed (the same applies to the eye-catching image 006SHSEP-EYE1 not shown), the active display 006SHAH,
Even if the hold display, hold number display (the first hold memory number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second hold memory number corresponding to the second special figure game are indicated by numbers, etc.), etc. are displayed. Good.

12-26 and 12-27 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 006SH. Specifically, FIGS. 12-26 and 12-27 show a part of the scenes in the example shown in FIG. 12-14 as an example, and FIG. 12-26 (A) → FIG. 12-. The transition is in the order of 26 (B) → FIG. 12-26 (C) → FIG. 12-27 (A) → FIG. 12-27 (B) → FIG. 12-27 (C).

FIG. 12-26 (A) shows five present box images 006SHPB-CL (present box effect (PBP-A) for executing the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A)).
Present box image 006SHPB-CL, present box image of present box production (PBP-B) for execution of group notice production (YEP-B) 006SHP
B-CL, present box production for the execution of button notice production (YEP-C) (
PBP-C) present box image 006SHPB-CL, character notice production (YEP-
Present box effect of present box effect (PBP-D) for execution of D) 006SHPB-CL, present box of present box effect (PBP-E) for execution of pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) This is a scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 12-14) in which the image 006SHPB-CL) is displayed.

FIG. 12-26 (B) shows the last one present box image 006SHPB-CL (
Present box production (PBP-D) for the execution of the character notice production (YEP-D)
Present box image 006SHPB-CL) is present box image 006SH
It is a scene immediately before changing to PB-OP (a scene immediately before T18 in FIG. 12-14).

FIG. 12-26 (C) is a scene in which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (the scene of T18 in FIG. 12-14). In the scene of FIG. 12-26 (C), it corresponds to the change of the present box image 006SHPB-CL to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (corresponding to the opening of the present box), and corresponds to the character advance notice production. Item image (movable body 006SH32
Item image) is displayed.

FIG. 12-27 (A) shows a scene in which the character advance notice production (YEP-D) is being performed (FIG. 12-1).
4 scenes from T19 to T20). In FIG. 12-27 (A), the movable body 006SH32 is operating.

12-27 (B) and 12-C show the scene where the jackpot symbol is displayed (Tb21 in FIG. 12-14).
~ Tb22 scene). In FIG. 12-27 (B), the small symbol "777" is displayed, and in FIG. 12-27 (C), the decorative symbol "777" is displayed.

(About the modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 006SH)
Subsequently, a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 006SH will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, after the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP (after the present box is opened), the present box image 006SHPB-OP and the item image are deleted. , One of the two may be erased, and the other may continue to be displayed without being erased. Moreover, you may continue to display both without erasing.

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, an item image corresponding to one notice effect actually executed is displayed (for example, FIG. 12-20 (for example, FIG. 12-20). In B), the item image corresponding to the group notice effect executed in FIG. 12-20 (C) is displayed, etc.), but a plurality of advance notice effects including one actually executed advance notice effect are described. The item image corresponding to may be displayed.
For example, in FIG. 12-20 (B), an item image (for example, an item image indicated as “group / re” or the like) corresponding to the group notice effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect may be displayed.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above description, an example in which the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006SHPB-OP has been described, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL is the present box image 006SHPB-.
It is not necessary to display the item image when it changes to OP. If the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP, the item image is displayed when the present box image 006SHPB-CL changes to the present box image 006SHPB-OP. The degree of expectation that will be a big hit may be different depending on when it is not done.

(Modification example 4 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, an example in which the timing at which the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed is constant has been described, but the present box image 006SHPB-CL may be displayed at any timing of a plurality of types. Present box image 006SHPB-C
Depending on the timing at which L is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different.

(Modification example 5 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, when displaying a plurality of present box images 006SHPB-CL,
An example of displaying a plurality of present boxes together has been described, but a plurality of present box images 006SHP
When displaying the B-CL, the present box images 006SHHPB-CL may be displayed one by one. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether a plurality of items are displayed together or one by one.

(Variation example 6 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is simply displayed (without executing any effect), but an example has been described. However, the present box image 006SHPB-CL has been described.
When is displayed (for example, the character displays the present box image 006SHPB-CL by magic or magic, the character displays the present box image 006.
You may perform the effect of bringing the SHPB-CL, etc.). Simply present box image 0
Present box image 006SHP when 06SHPB-CL is displayed and after production
The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different from that when B-CL is displayed. Further, there may be a case where the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed after the effect and a case where the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed after the effect. For example, there may be a case where the magic succeeds and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed, and a case where the magic fails and the present box image 006SHPB-CL is not displayed.

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image 006SHPB-CL has been described as an example of displaying at the left end of the display area of the image display device 5, but may be displayed at another position. For example, in the vicinity of the active display area 006 SHAHA (see FIG. 12-19) (for example, the active display 006S).
It may be displayed on the upper part of HAH, etc.). In case of more than one, active display area 006SH
It may be displayed side by side in the vicinity of AHA.

(Modification example 8 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, FIG. 12-11 has described the execution timing and the like of each notice effect, but FIG. 1
2-11 is an example, and each effect may be executed at other execution timings.

As an example of the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect will be described. In the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is earlier than the execution start timing of the group notice effect, but the execution start of the cut-in notice effect. The timing may be later than the execution start timing of the group notice effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect is before the development, but the execution start timing of the cut-in notice effect may be after the development.
Further, the cut-in notice effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on the execution start timing. Also,
In the example of FIG. 12-11, the cut-in notice effect can be executed only once (although the execution start timing is only one place), but it may be executed twice or more (execution start timing is set). There may be two or more places).

As an example of the setting suggestion effect, the heat character effect will be described. In the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the heat character effect is later than the execution start timing of the group notice effect, but the execution start timing of the heat character effect is It may be earlier than the execution start timing of the group notice effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the execution start timing of the hot character is before the development, but the execution start timing of the hot character may be after the development. The thermal character effect may be executed at any one of a plurality of timings. Further, in the example of FIG. 12-11, the thermal character effect can be executed only once (although the execution start timing is only one place), but it may be executed twice or more (execution start timing). There may be two or more places).

(Modification example 9 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, when the hot character effect and the pseudo-continuous notice effect overlap, the hot character effect is prioritized over the pseudo-continuous notice effect (“heat” is displayed on the front side, etc.), but an example has been described (Fig. 12-21). (C)), the same may be applied to the relationship between the heat character effect and other notice effects (excluding the character advance notice effects). In other words, setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and notice effect (pseudo continuous notice effect, etc.)
When and overlap, the setting suggestion effect may be prioritized.

(Modification example 10 of the feature portion 006SH)
In relation to the modification 9, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the shorter execution time may be preferentially executed. In this embodiment, a setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and a notice effect (a notice effect)
Since the execution time is shorter for the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) (see Fig. 12-11), the setting suggestion effect (heat character effect) and the advance notice effect (pseudo-ream advance notice effect, etc.) ), The setting suggestion effect is prioritized (see FIG. 12-21 (C)). Further, when the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect overlap, the one with the least appearance frequency may be preferentially executed. The frequency of appearance may be logical (calculated) or may be based on the actual operating status (on the day, etc.).

(Modification example 11 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, there is a thermal character effect (see FIG. 12-9) that suggests whether the set value is 1 to 5 or 6 and the set value is 1 to 3. An eye-catching effect (see FIG. 12-10) that suggests whether the set value is present or the set value is any of 4 to 6 has been described as a set value suggestion effect, but the suggestion target is not limited to the above. .. For example, it suggests whether it is an odd number setting (whether the set value is 1, 3, 5) or an even number setting (whether the set value is 2, 4, or 6). The setting suggestion effect may be executed. Also, for example, is it a low setting (whether the set value is 1 or 2) or is it a medium setting (set value is 3 or 4).
, Or a setting suggestion effect suggesting whether the setting is high (whether the set value is 5 or) may be executed.

(Modification example 12 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the suggestion target (heat character production: "1 to 5" or "6", eye-catching production: "1 to"
Although 3 ”or“ 4 to 6 ”) have described different setting suggestion effects, different setting suggestion effects with the same suggestion target may be executed. For example, in a certain variation (for example, in Super Reach B (variation patterns # 14, # 18), only the effect A is executed, and only the effect B (the jackpot reliability is the same as the effect A) is executed. In some cases, neither A nor the effect B is executed, and as the effect mode of the effect A when the effect A is executed, when the setting value is 1, the effect A in the normal mode is 75% (the effect A in the special mode is 25). %), And when the set value is 6, the effect A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 25% (the effect A in the special mode is 75%), and when the effect B is executed. As the effect mode of the effect B, when the set value is 1, the effect A in the normal mode is executed at a rate of 99% (the effect A in the special mode is 0.1%), and when the setting value is 6, the effect A in the normal mode is executed. The effect A may be executed at a rate of 1% (the effect A of the special aspect is 99.9%). According to the above, both the effect A and the effect B have the same suggestion target (“1 to 5”). "Or" 6 "), but the reliability of the set value suggestion (for example, the suggestion that the set value is" 6 ") is different between the effect A and the effect B. That is, the effect A in the normal mode. A special aspect of production A even when
The reliability of the jackpot is the same when the effect B in the normal mode is executed, when the effect B in the special mode is executed, but when the effect B in the special mode is executed, the special mode is executed. The reliability (accuracy of suggestion) that the set value is 6 is higher than that when the effect A of is executed.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, an example in which the set value suggestion effect suggests the current set value has been described, but it may suggest whether or not the set value is changed. The hot character effect (or eye-catching effect) may suggest whether or not the set value has been changed, or the setting suggestion effect different from the hot character effect or eye-catching effect suggests whether or not the set value has been changed. You may try to do it.

(Modification example 14 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the example in which the player's action is not involved when the set value suggestion effect is executed has been described, but the player's action may be involved when the set value suggestion effect is executed. As an example, a promotion effect that encourages the player to move (button operation, screen touch, operation of a model (lever, sword, gun, etc.) provided on the outer frame, etc.) within a predetermined period before the start of execution of the heat character effect. And run
If there is an action of the player within the predetermined period, the heat character effect may be executed (
If the player does not move within the predetermined period, the heat character effect may not always be executed, or the heat character effect may or may not be executed).

(Variation example 15 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above, the eye-catching effect has been described as a setting suggestion effect that is not executed when a big hit occurs and is executed when a deviation occurs. Is not limited to eye-catching production. For example, a scene in which a friendly character is defeated by an enemy character in a battle super reach (for example, FIG. 1).
In the scene of 2-25 (A), etc.), the enemy character (or the dialogue of the ally character) executes a dialogue effect that emits one of a plurality of types of dialogue, and suggests a set value depending on the type of the emitted dialogue, etc. You may do so. For example, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, the dialogue A is determined as the dialogue of the enemy character at a determination rate of 65% and the dialogue B is determined at a determination ratio of 35%, and when the setting value is any of 4 to 6, the enemy is determined. Line A as the character's line 3
5% and dialogue B may be determined at a determination rate of 65%. For example, when the set value is any of 1 to 3, the line without dialogue is determined at 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character is determined at 30%, the dialogue of the ally character is determined at a determination rate of 10%, and the set value is any of 4 to 6. When this is the case, the dialogue of the enemy character may be determined by 60%, the dialogue of the enemy character may be determined by 10%, and the dialogue of the ally character may be determined by 30%.

From the scene where the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 12-25 (A)), the scene where the ally character wins the enemy character (for example, the scene shown in FIG. 12-27 (B)).
), Etc.) When there is a possibility that the reversal effect that shifts to) is executed, the above-mentioned dialogue effect may not be executed in the scene where the ally character is defeated by the enemy character. Alternatively, the above-mentioned dialogue effect may be executed after it is completely denied that the reverse effect is executed (timing after the timing at which the reverse effect is executed).

(Modification example 16 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the setting suggestion effect (eye catch effect) that is executed when the jackpot is not executed and is not executed, and the setting suggestion effect (heat character) that is executed both when the jackpot is hit and when the hit is off. However, it is possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that is not executed when it is out of order and is executed when it is a big hit. For example, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation notification effect that notifies a jackpot during variable display, and there are a plurality of types of production modes of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, and when it is a special mode, a set value (or setting change) is suggested. You may do so.

As an example, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect that causes the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in rainbow colors during variable display, and when it is in a normal light emission mode (for example, blinking at a normal speed), it notifies the confirmation of a big hit and emits special light. In the mode (for example, blinking of a special speed), the confirmation of the jackpot may be notified and the set value (or the setting change) may be suggested. As another example, it is possible to execute a definite notification effect (full rotation effect) in which the decorative symbols are rotated in a state where the numbers are aligned during the variable display, and a normal effect mode (for example, full rotation in the forward direction from top to bottom). When it is, the confirmation of the big hit is notified, and when it is a special effect mode (for example, full rotation in the reverse direction from the bottom to the top), the confirmation of the big hit is notified and the set value (or the setting change) is suggested. It may be.

(Modification example 17 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, as the advance notice effect, the cut-in advance notice effect (YEP-A1, YEP-A2), the group advance notice effect (YEP-B), the button advance notice effect (YEP-C1, YEP-C2), and the character advance notice effect (YEP- D), an example of executing the pseudo-continuous notice effect (YEP-E) has been described, but the advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the development notice effect as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (D), (E), and (F) may be executed. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-2 (D), (E), and (F), the background image is cracked like glass during the reach, which leads to a super reach.

(Modification example 18 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, for example, when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) is executed, the present box effect (PBP-A) targeting the execution of the cut-in notice effect (PBP-A).
An example of executing a present box effect for executing the notice effect when executing the notice effect has been described, but when executing the notice effect, another effect is executed for executing the notice effect. You may. For example, in the case of executing the notice effect, the timer effect may be executed in place of or in addition to the present box effect for the execution of the notice effect.

For example, a timer image displaying the remaining time (see, for example, FIG. 12-5 (C)) is displayed.
A timer image in which the remaining time is gradually reduced and the remaining time is zero (see, for example, FIG. 12-5 (D)).
Is displayed, the item image may be displayed (or the item image may not be displayed), and any of the advance notice effects may be executed. The degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether the present box image 006SHPB-CL is displayed or the timer image is displayed.

In addition, the present box image and the timer image may be displayed at the same time. For example, when two present box images are displayed when the cut-in notice effect (YEP-A) and the group notice effect (YEP) are executed (the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the group notice). When the present box image corresponding to the effect is displayed) or when two timer images are displayed (the timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed). In addition to the case), when one present box image and one timer image are displayed (when the present box image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and the timer image corresponding to the group notice effect are displayed, or There may be a timer image corresponding to the cut-in notice effect and a present box image corresponding to the group notice effect). In the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different depending on whether the present box image and the timer image are displayed at the same time or not at the same time.

The timer in the timer image shown in FIGS. 12-5 (C) and 12-5 (D) is a digital timer (timer that displays the remaining time by a numerical value), but is a needle type (the remaining time is displayed by the position of the needle or the like). It may be a timer of the timer). Further, it does not have to be a timer as long as it indicates the remaining time (for example, it may be an hourglass or the like). Depending on which type (digital timer, hand-type timer, hourglass, etc.) is displayed, the degree of expectation of a big hit may be different.

When displaying a plurality of timer images, they may be displayed side by side (for example, FIG. 12-).
5 (E)), the number may be displayed without arranging (see, for example, FIG. 12-5 (F)). The number of present box images may be displayed without arranging them.

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 006SH)
In the above embodiment, the set value is suggested by the heat character effect and the eye-catching effect.
Suggesting the set value is not limited to the hot character effect and the eye-catching effect.

As an example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in an effect (for example, a mini character effect) performed before the reach or the period before the pseudo-continuous temporary stop. The present box effect or the like may not be executed for the setting suggestion effect (that is, the present box may not be opened and suggested that the mini character effect or the like is executed).

As another example, the set value may be suggested by the present box effect.
Specifically, for example, in the present box production, in addition to the present box image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 12-5 (A) and 12-5), the present box image of the special aspect (for example, FIG. 12-5 (G)). (See (H)) can be displayed, the present box image in the normal mode suggests the execution of any notice effect, and the present box image in the special mode suggests the execution of any notice effect and the set value (or). , Setting change) may be suggested.
The present box image 006SHPB2-CL of FIG. 12-5 (G) is shown in FIG. 12-.
The display mode (pattern in this example) is different from that of the present box image 006SHPB-CL of 5 (A). The present box image 006SHPB2-OP of FIG. 12-5 (H) is shown in FIG.
-5 (B) present box image 006SHPB-CL and display mode (pattern in this example)
Is different.

As another example, the set value may be suggested by the timer effect. In particular,
For example, in the timer effect, in addition to the timer image of the normal mode (see FIGS. 12-5 (C) (D)), the timer image of the special mode (see, for example, FIGS. 12-5 (I) (J)) can be displayed. age,
The timer image in the normal mode may suggest the execution of any of the advance notice effects, and the timer image in the special mode may suggest the execution of any of the advance notice effects and the set value (or setting change). .. The timer image of FIG. 12-5 (I) is different from the timer image of FIG. 12-5 (C) in the display mode (presence or absence of a bell in this example). The timer image of FIG. 12-5 (J) is shown in FIG. 12-5.
The display mode (presence or absence of a bell in this example) is different from the timer image of (D).

(Modification example 20 of feature unit 006SH)
In the above, the present box image (present box effect) is determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (FIGS. 9, 12-16, 12).
-17), the present box image may be determined in the look-ahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the mode of determining the present box image in the variable display start setting process (step S171), the present box image is determined based on whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-7). When determining the present box image in the reading notice setting process (step S161), the received symbol specification command (whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) The present box image may be determined based on the contents of the effect control command)) indicating the determination result and the variation category specification command (effect control command indicating the category (type) of the determined variation pattern). It should be noted that a plurality of present box images may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one present box image may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. May be good. That is, a plurality of present box images may be associated with one variation, or one present box image may be associated with each variation.

In addition, "suggestion of setting value" is only to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range), and that it is a certain setting value (or a setting value within a certain range). It may not be deterministically notified, or it may be deterministically notified that it is a certain set value (or a set value within a certain range). For example, by making sure that a certain effect or a certain display is not determined when the setting is low (for example, a setting value of 3 or less), the effect or the display or the like is set to a high setting (for example, a setting value of 4 or less). It will definitely notify you of the fact.

In the above explanation, the display result (missing, big hit) is included in the fluctuation pattern (
For example, the fluctuation pattern # 13 includes not only the execution of Super Reach A but also a deviation, and the fluctuation pattern # 17 includes a big hit in addition to the execution of Super Reach A). By using the variation pattern (contents of the variation pattern specification command) without using the display result (contents of the variable display result notification command, etc.), various effects (notice effect, present box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) are determined. (For example, FIG. 1
By using 2-3, Fig. 12-4, Fig. 12-7, Fig. 12-9, Fig. 12-10) and display results (contents of variable display result notification command, etc.), various effects (notice effect, present) Box effect, setting suggestion effect, etc.) may be decided.

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. For example, in a certain state (for example, a state that is not an advantageous state), whether to shift to another state (for example, an advantageous state) periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range) is determined from the normal time. In slot machines that draw lots with a high probability, multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to other states and specific displays (present box image, timer image, etc.) corresponding to the advance notice effects to be executed are displayed. The specific effect to be displayed can be executed, and the setting suggestion effect can be set to another state (
It can be executed when it is not controlled to (advantageous state), and when the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and the specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the advance notice effect is executed. When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed, the ratio of being controlled to another state (advantageous state) is higher than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the advance notice effect is executed. , When the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed corresponding to the setting suggestion effect.

Alternatively, in the slot machine that draws with high probability whether to shift to the second advantageous state (for example, AT state, ART state, etc.) in the first advantageous state (for example, CZ, bonus game, etc.), the first In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute multiple types of advance notice effects with different expectations for transition to the second advantageous state, and specific effects that display specific displays (present box image, timer image, etc.) in response to the advance notice effects. This is possible when the setting suggestion effect is not controlled to the second advantageous state, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed and when the notice effect is executed before the advance notice effect is executed. There are cases where the specific display corresponding to is not displayed, and when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the advance notice effect is executed, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a special mode before the advance notice effect is executed. , When the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, it is in the second advantageous state than when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect. When the rate of control is high and the setting suggestion effect is executed, the specific display may not be displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature Unit 006SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 006SH)
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player, and the player has a disadvantage setting value and a player more than the disadvantage setting value. A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value having a high degree of advantage for the user, and an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the effect. , The effect executing means includes a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, the cut-in advance notice effect shown in FIG. 12-1, group advance notice effect, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the advance notice effect (for example, FIG. A specific effect for displaying the present box image, timer image, etc. shown in 12-5 can be executed, and a setting suggestion effect related to the setting means (for example, FIG. 12-) can be executed.
(The special eye-catching effect shown in 8 (A), etc.) can be executed when the advantageous state is not controlled (for example, Ta22 to Ta23 can be executed as shown in FIGS. 12-11).
There are a case where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect and a case where the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is not displayed before the execution of the notice effect (for example, FIG. (Refer to the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the present box effect shown in 12-7), when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the specific display is displayed before the execution of the notice effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-6, the present box image 006SHPB-CL is changed to the present box image 006S.
(Change to HPB-OP), when the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect, the specific display corresponding to the notice effect is displayed before the execution of the notice effect. The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when it is not displayed (see, for example, the rate of determining whether or not to execute the present box effect shown in FIG. 12-7), and when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the said The specific display is not displayed in response to the setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 12).
As shown in -11, the cut-in notice effect, group notice effect, pseudo-continuous notice effect, button notice effect, and character notice effect are subject to the present box, but the hot character effect and eye-catching effect are present boxes. Not the subject of).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. That is, if the setting suggestion effect is included as the target of the specific display, the player presumes that the setting suggestion effect does not control the advantageous state, and the player's expectation is reduced, which makes the game more enjoyable. However, in the above-mentioned game machine, since the setting suggestion effect is not included as the target of the specific display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 is not executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state, and can be executed when it is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the eye-catching effect shown in FIG. 12-10). Etc.) and the second setting suggestion effect (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 12-9) that can be executed both when the advantageous state is controlled and when the advantageous state is not controlled. It is possible.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different executable scenes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The gaming machine of the means 1 can be executed when it is controlled to the advantageous state without being executed when it is not controlled to the advantageous state.
It may be possible to execute a setting suggestion effect (for example, a definite notification effect exemplified in a modified example).

(Means 3 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 has a plurality of types of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the thermal character effect shown in FIG. 12-9 and the eye catch shown in FIG. 12-10) having different accuracy of the suggestion regarding the setting means. (Direction, etc.) can be executed.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, since it is possible to execute a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects having different suggestion accuracy, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4 pertaining to feature unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 3 can execute variable display of the identification information, and include a look-ahead determination means for determining whether or not the identification information is controlled to the advantageous state, and the specific display is based on the look-ahead determination. (For example, look-ahead notice setting process (step S)
The display of the present box image may be decided in 161)).

According to the game machine, for example, a specific display can be displayed before the start of the fluctuation based on the look-ahead determination, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 5 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 4 can display a plurality of the specific displays (for example, FIG. 12).
(Refer to -19 (B) and FIG. 12-25 (A)), a plurality of display numbers of the specific display is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than a single number.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to pay attention to the number of displays of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 6 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 5 have a plurality of types of display modes of the specific display (for example, FIG. 12).
(Refer to -5), and the setting means may be suggested according to the display mode of the specific display.

According to the game machine, it is possible to pay attention to the display mode of the specific display and improve the interest of the game.

(Means 7 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 6 have an execution period of the advance notice effect (for example, an execution period of the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect of FIG. 12-11) and an execution period of the setting suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 12-11). When the execution period of the heat character effect of the above overlaps with that of the above-mentioned advance notice effect, the setting suggestion effect is preferentially executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21 (C), "heat" is changed to "heat". Displayed on the front side of "Re").

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage caused by overlooking the suggestion.

(Means 8 for Feature Unit 006SH)
In the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 7, the determination of whether to execute the setting suggestion effect and the determination of whether to execute the advance notice effect are independently performed. For example, whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process B (see FIG. 12-18), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by the effect determination process A (see FIGS. 12-15 to 12-17). Will be done.

According to the game machine, the setting suggestion effect and the advance notice effect can be suitably executed.
It also facilitates design.

(Means 9 for Feature Unit 006SH)
The gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 8 can execute the variable display of the identification information, and may be able to execute the setting suggestion effect at a plurality of timings within the variable display period of the identification information.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to pay attention to a plurality of timings and improve the interest of the game. Further, since it can be executed at a plurality of timings, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed.

(Explanation of feature section 011SH)
Next, a game machine related to the feature unit 011SH will be described. The gaming machine according to the feature unit 011SH is a gaming machine capable of playing a game. In this embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of playing a game will be described as an example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH includes a game control means and an effect executing means. The game control means is realized by, for example, the CPU 103 of the main board 11. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The front view and the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH are the same as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH (see FIG. 11-1). However, for convenience of explanation, the feature unit 027SH
The movable body 027SH32 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above is referred to as a movable body 011SH32 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 011SH.

The jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH is shown in FIG. 11-2 (
This is the same as the jackpot probability (low probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH shown in A). The jackpot probability (high probability state) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH is shown in FIG.
Big hit probability of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature unit 027SH shown in -2 (B) (high probability state)
Is similar to.

The type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH is shown in FIG. 11-.
This is the same as the type of jackpot (big hit type) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 027SH shown in 2 (C). Further, the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH is the same as the distribution of the jackpot type of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 027SH shown in FIGS. 11-2 (D) and 11-2 (E).

FIG. 13-1 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH. FIG. 13-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times). Fluctuation pattern # 10 is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern # 11 is a non-reach out-of-reach (for shortening) fluctuation pattern. Fluctuation pattern # 12 is a fluctuation pattern that is out of normal reach. Fluctuation pattern # 13 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (weak battle) and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 14
Is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (medium battle) and eventually becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 15 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (strong battle) and finally becomes out of order. Fluctuation pattern # 16 is a fluctuation pattern of small hits. Fluctuation pattern # 17 is a fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot. Fluctuation pattern # 18 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (weak battle) and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 19 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (medium battle) and finally becomes a big hit. Fluctuation pattern # 20 is a fluctuation pattern that develops from normal reach to super reach (strong battle) and finally becomes a big hit.

FIG. 13-1 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern. According to the example shown in FIG. 13-1 (B), the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is super reach (strong battle)> super reach (medium battle)> super reach (weak battle)> normal reach. The expected degree of jackpot of a certain effect a is, for example, (probability that effect a is executed when a jackpot is reached) × (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that effect a is executed when a jackpot is achieved). × (Probability of becoming a big hit) + (Probability that production a is executed when it does not become a big hit) × (Probability of not becoming a big hit)
} (When the expected jackpot is "1", it is always "big hit").

For example, the reliability of super reach (weak battle) (when the setting value is 1) is (0.1 × 1/320) / {(0.1 × 1/320) + (0.008) in the low base state. × 319 /
320)} = about 3.8%. Also, the reliability of super reach (weak battle) (set value 1)
In the case of), in the high base state, (0.1 × 1/320) / {(0.1 × 1/320)
) + (0.004 × 319/320)} = about 7.3%.

The reliability of Super Reach (medium battle) (when the setting value is 1) is in the low base state.
(0.25 x 1/320) / {(0.25 x 1/320) + (0.001 x 319/32)
0)} = about 44%. In addition, the reliability of super reach (medium battle) (when the set value is 1) is (0.25 × 1/320) / {(0.25 × 1/320) in the high base state.
+ (0.004 × 319/320)} = about 16%.

The reliability of Super Reach (strong battle) (when the setting value is 1) is in the low base state.
(0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.001 × 319/320)
} = Approximately 65%. In addition, the reliability of super reach (strong battle) (when the set value is 1) is (0.6 × 1/320) / {(0.6 × 1/320) + (0.) in the high base state.
002 x 319/320)} = about 48%.

According to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), if the reliability of super reach (weak battle), super reach (medium battle), and super reach (strong battle) is different between the low base state and the high base state. However, like Super Reach A and Super Reach B in the feature section 027SH (see Fig. 11-3 (B)), Super Reach (weak battle), Super Reach (medium battle), Super Reach (strong battle) The reliability may be common between the low base state and the high base state.

Further, according to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 11 is not determined during the low base, but the fluctuation pattern # 11 is determined even during the low base according to, for example, the number of reserved memories. It may be. Further, according to the example of FIG. 13-1 (B), the fluctuation pattern # 1 during the high base
Although 0 is not determined, the fluctuation pattern # 10 may be determined even during a high base, for example, depending on the number of reserved memories.

FIG. 13-2 is an example of the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous notice effect (pseudo-continuous effect). In this embodiment, the pseudo-ream notice effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern determined after the fluctuation pattern is determined (pseudo-reamless or pseudo-repeated (1 time, 2 times, 3 times)). (Determine)
doing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, non-reach (that is, fluctuation pattern # 10)
, # 11), the pseudo-continuousness is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of a small hit (that is, fluctuation pattern # 16), the pseudo-continuousness is determined at a rate of 100%. In the case of normal reach (that is, fluctuation patterns # 12, # 17), pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 80%, and pseudo-reach (one pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of super reach (weak battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns # 13 and # 18), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 30%, and the pseudo-reach (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 40%. Pseudo-repeated (two pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 30%. In the case of super reach (medium battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns # 14, # 19), 20 pseudo-reams
%, Pseudo-repeated (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at 30%, Pseudo-repeated (2 pseudo-ream) is determined at 30%, and Pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3). Times) is determined at a rate of 20%. In the case of super reach (strong battle) (that is, fluctuation patterns # 15 and # 20), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 10%, and the pseudo-reach (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 20%. Pseudo-repeated (two pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-sequential (three pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 40%.

According to the example of FIG. 13-2, the degree of expectation for the player is higher when the pseudo-ream is performed than when it is not performed, and when the number of pseudo-reams is large, it is higher than when it is not performed. Become. For example, in the case of 1 pseudo-ream, normal reach or higher is confirmed, in the case of 2 pseudo-ream, super reach (weak battle) or higher is confirmed, and in the case of 3 pseudo-ream, super reach (medium battle). The above is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 13-2, in the case of a small hit (fluctuation pattern # 16), the pseudo-continuity is set to 10.
Although it is determined at a rate of 0%, pseudo-co-ownership may be determined even in the case of a small hit. Further, according to FIG. 13-1 (A), the special figure fluctuation time of the small hit (variation pattern # 16) is 1.
Although it is 5 seconds, if the pseudo continuous possession is determined even in the case of a small hit, the special figure fluctuation time of the small hit (variation pattern # 16) may be lengthened (for example, the small hit). Then at most pseudo-ream 1
If it is up to the number of times, it may be about the same as the special figure fluctuation time of normal reach, and if it allows more than two pseudo-reams, it may be about the same as the special figure fluctuation time of super reach).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 011SH executes a battle effect (a battle effect of any of a weak battle, a medium battle, and a strong battle) in the super reach (see FIG. 13-1 (A)). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of battle production production patterns (battle production production patterns) are prepared. Each of the multiple types of battle effects can be identified by the battle effect pattern.

13-3 and 13-4 are explanatory views for explaining the battle effect. Figure 13-5
Is an example of each scene of the battle production. FIG. 13-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the battle effect.

The "weak title" in the "content" column of FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4 is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a weak battle. For example, a weak title image 011SHJT as shown in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed. Weak title image 011SHJ shown in FIG. 13-5 (A)
In T, the opponent of the battle is character A (a strong enemy who appears as an opponent of a weak battle), and the expectation of victory is one star (the expectation of victory is relatively low because the opponent is a strong enemy). To that effect) is shown.

The "medium title" is a production that displays a title that suggests the start of a medium battle. For example, the medium title image 011SHTT as shown in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed. Figure 13-
In the middle title image 011SHTT shown in 5 (B), the opponent of the battle is character B (the middle enemy who appears as the opponent of the middle battle), and the expectation of victory is 2 stars (the opponent is). Since it is a medium enemy, the expectation for victory is medium).

The "strong title" is an effect of displaying a title suggesting the start of a strong battle. For example, a strong title image 011SHKT as shown in FIG. 13-5 (C) is displayed. Figure 13-
In the strong title image 011SHKT shown in 5 (C), the opponent of the battle is character C (a weak enemy who appears as an opponent of a strong battle), and the expectation of victory is 3 stars (the opponent is). Since it is a weak enemy, the expectation of victory is relatively high).

"Weak battle start" is a production that notifies the start of a weak battle. For example, FIG. 13-5 (D)
), The weak battle start image 011SHJBS is displayed. In the weak battle start image 011SHJBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (D), it is shown that the battle with the character A (a strong enemy appearing as an opponent of the weak battle) is started.

"Start of medium battle" is a production that notifies the start of medium battle. For example, FIG. 13-5 (E)
), The medium battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. In the medium battle start image 011SHTBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (E), it is shown that a battle with character B (a medium enemy appearing as an opponent of the medium battle) is started.

"Strong battle start" is a production that notifies the start of a strong battle. For example, FIG. 13-5 (F)
), The strong battle start image 011SHKBS is displayed. In the strong battle start image 011SHKBS shown in FIG. 13-5 (F), it is shown that a battle with character C (a weak enemy appearing as an opponent of a strong battle) is started.

"With accessory movement" is an effect of operating the movable body 011SH32. For example, FIG. 13-
As shown in 5 (G), the movable body 011SH32 is operated.

"Battle (defeat)" is a production that notifies the defeat as a result of the battle. For example, FIG. 13-
The LOSE image 011SHKH1 as shown in 5 (H) is displayed.

"Battle (win)" is a production that notifies the victory as a result of the battle. For example, FIG. 13-
The WIN image 011SHKH2 as shown in 5 (I) is displayed.

"Relief (win)" is a relief effect that is executed after notifying the defeat as a result of the battle (simply ""
It may also be called "relief"). For example, a relief effect as shown in FIG. 13-5 (J) is executed.

FIG. 13-3 (A) shows that the super reach (weak battle) is off (that is, the fluctuation pattern # 13).
) Shows the contents of the battle production. On the outskirts of super reach (weak battle), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-"
Execute the battle production of "J-L2".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" is a battle production with a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). is there. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011S in FIG. 13-5 (A)).
HJT is displayed), and then the start of the weak battle is notified (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS of FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the weak battle. There is an operation of the movable body 011SH32, and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, FIG. 13-).
5 (H) LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed).

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → battle (defeat). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" and the battle production pattern "B"
What is the battle production of "P-J-L2"? In the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1", the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas the battle production pattern "BP-J-" is performed.
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "L2".

In addition, in the out-of-super reach (weak battle) (variation pattern # 13), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-J-L2"
Although it was explained that the battle effect of is executed, specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), the battle effect pattern "BP-J-L1" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the battle effect is performed. The pattern "BP-J-L2" is determined at a rate of 80%, and one of the determined patterns is executed.

Figure 13-3 (B) shows the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (that is, fluctuation pattern # 18).
) Shows the contents of the battle production. In the super reach (weak battle) jackpot, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-"
Battle production of "J-W2" or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-J-W3",
Alternatively, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" is a battle production with a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → character movement available → battle (win). is there. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011S in FIG. 13-5 (A)).
HJT is displayed), and then the start of the weak battle is notified (for example, the weak battle start image 011SHJBS of FIG. 13-5 (D) is displayed), as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G) during the weak battle. There is an operation of the movable body 011SH32, and the victory is notified as a result of the battle (Fig. 13-5 (I)).
WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed).

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → battle (win). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" and the battle production pattern "B"
What is the battle production of "P-J-W2"? In the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1", the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas the battle production pattern "BP-J-" is performed.
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "W2".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is as follows: weak title → weak battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) It is a battle production of the mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by Notification of the start of a weak battle (for example, Fig. 13-5)
The weak battle start image 011SHJBS of (D) is displayed), and Fig. 13-5 (G) during the weak battle.
), The movable body 011SH32 is operated, and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 of FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed), and subsequently, FIG. 13-
As shown in 5 (J), the relief effect is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" is a battle production with a production mode such as weak title → weak battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" are the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3".
In the battle production of, the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4", the movable body 011SH32 is not operated.

In addition, in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-J-W2"
It was explained that the battle production of the battle production, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-J-W4" will be executed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A), the battle effect pattern “BP-J-W1” is set to 40.
The battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the battle production pattern "B" is determined.
"PJ-W4" is determined at a rate of 10%, and one of the determined determinations is executed.

Figure 13-3 (C) shows that Super Reach (medium battle) is off (that is, fluctuation pattern # 14).
) Shows the contents of the battle production. On the outskirts of super reach (medium battle), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-TL1" or the battle production pattern "BP-"
Battle production of "TL2" or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-T-L3",
Alternatively, the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L4" is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-TL1" has a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). It is a battle production. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (
For example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and then the start of the middle battle is notified (for example, the middle battle start image 011SHTBS in FIG. 13-5 (E) is displayed). During the battle, there is an operation of the movable body 011SH32 as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, the LOSE image 011SH in FIG. 13-5 (H)).
KH1 is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is a battle production with a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" are the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1".
While the weak titles are displayed in the battle production of, the battle production pattern "BP-T"
The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of "-L2".

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (defeat). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" are the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1".
In the battle effect of, the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-L3", the movable body 011SH32 is not operated.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (C), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4" is a battle production in a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → battle (defeat). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" and the battle production pattern "B".
What is the battle production of "PT-L4"? In the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2", the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas the battle production pattern "BP-T-" is performed.
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "L4".

In addition, in the out-of-super reach (medium battle) (variation pattern # 14), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2"
It was explained that the battle production of the above, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4" is executed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (B), the battle effect pattern “BP-T-L1” is set to 10.
The battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-L3" is determined at a ratio of 30%, and the battle production pattern "B" is determined.
"PT-L4" is determined at a rate of 40% and one of the determined is executed.

Figure 13-3 (D) shows the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (that is, fluctuation pattern # 19).
) Shows the contents of the battle production. In the super reach (medium battle) jackpot, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-"
Battle production of "T-W2" or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-T-W3",
Alternatively, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6", or The battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" has a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (win). It is a battle production. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, the weak title image 011SHJT in FIG. 13-5 (A) is displayed), followed by A title suggesting the start of a medium battle is displayed (
For example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and during the middle battle, the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the victory is notified as a result of the battle (FIG. The WIN image 011SHKH2 of 13-5 (I) is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" is a battle production with a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" are the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1".
While the weak titles are displayed in the battle production of, the battle production pattern "BP-T"
The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of "-W2".

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W3" are the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1".
In the battle effect of, the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W3", the movable body 011SH32 is not operated.

As shown in FIG. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is a battle production in a production mode such as middle title → middle battle start → battle (win). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2" and the battle production pattern "B"
What is the battle production of "PT-W4"? In the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2", the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas the battle production pattern "BP-T-" is performed.
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "W4".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is as follows: weak title → medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) ) Is a battle production. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (A)).
The weak title image 011SHJT is displayed), and then the title suggesting the start of the middle battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed).
During the middle battle, there is an operation of the movable body 011SH32 as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 in FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed), followed by , The relief effect is executed as shown in FIG. 13-5 (J).

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is as follows: medium title → medium battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) It is a battle production of the mode. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of "-T-W5", whereas the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" has a production mode such as weak title → medium title → medium battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). It is a battle production. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of "-T-W5", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W7".

As shown in Fig. 13-3 (D), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" is a battle production with a production mode such as medium title → medium battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" are the battle production pattern "BP-T-W6".
In the battle production of, the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8", the movable body 011SH32 is not operated.

In addition, in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-T-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-T-W2"
Battle production, or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-T-W3", or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-T-W4", or battle production pattern "BP-T"
-W5 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-T-W6 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-T-W7 "battle production, or battle production pattern"
It was explained that the battle production of "BP-T-W8" will be executed. Specifically, for example, FIG. 13-
As shown in 6 (B), the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1" is determined at a rate of 20%, the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle effect pattern is determined. "BP-T-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is determined at a rate of 15%, and battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is determined at a rate of 10%. The battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-W7" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-" is determined. W8 "5
Determined at a rate of% and implement one of the determined.

Figure 13-4 (A) shows that Super Reach (strong battle) is off (that is, fluctuation pattern # 15).
) Shows the contents of the battle production. In the out-of-super reach (strong battle), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-"
Battle production of "K-L2" or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-L3",
Alternatively, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6" is executed. ..

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat) It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (A)).
The weak title image 011SHJT is displayed), and then the title suggesting the start of the middle battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed).
Subsequently, a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, the strong title image 011SHKT of FIG. 13-5 (C) is displayed), and then the start of the strong battle is notified (for example, FIG. 13).
-5 (F) strong battle start image 011SHKBS is displayed), and during the strong battle Figure 13-5
As shown in (G), there is an operation of the movable body 011SH32, and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (
For example, the LOSE image 011SHKH1 of FIG. 13-5 (H) is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" has a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). It is a battle production. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the weak title is not displayed in the battle production of "-K-L1", whereas the weak title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" is a battle production with a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" are the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2".
In the battle production of, the middle title is displayed, while the battle production pattern "BP-K"
The difference is that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of "-L3".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss). Is. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of "-K-L1", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L4".

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" is a battle production of a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (defeat). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" are the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2".
In the battle effect of, the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L5", the movable body 011SH32 is not operated.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (A), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L6" is a battle production in a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → battle (defeat). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3" and the battle production pattern "B"
What is the battle production of "P-K-L6"? In the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L3", the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas the battle production pattern "BP-K-"
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "L6".

In addition, in the out-of-super reach (strong battle) (variation pattern # 15), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" or the battle production pattern "BP-K-L2"
Battle production, or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-L3", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-L4", or battle production pattern "BP-K"
It has been explained that the battle effect of "-L5" or the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-L6" is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C), the battle effect is performed. The pattern "BP-K-L1" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1" is determined.
2 ”is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle production pattern“ BP-K-L3 ”is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern“ BP-K-L4 ”is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle The production pattern "BP-K-L5" is decided at a rate of 25%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-L"
6 ”is determined at a rate of 30% and one of the determined is executed.

Figure 13-4 (B) shows the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (that is, fluctuation pattern # 20).
) Shows the contents of the battle production. In the super reach (strong battle) jackpot, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-"
Battle production of "K-W2" or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W3",
Alternatively, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5", or the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6", or Battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W8", or battle production pattern "BP-K-W9"
, Or the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10", or
Battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" or battle production pattern "B"
Execute the battle production of "PK-W12".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (win) It is a battle production of the production mode. That is, in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (A)).
The weak title image 011SHJT is displayed), and then the title suggesting the start of the middle battle is displayed (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT in FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed).
Subsequently, a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, the strong title image 011SHKT of FIG. 13-5 (C) is displayed), and the movable body is displayed during the strong battle as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G). There is an operation of 011SH32, and the victory is notified as a result of the battle (WI in FIG. 13-5 (I)).
N image 011SHKH2 is displayed).

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" has a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (win). It is a battle production. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of "-K-W1", whereas the weak titles are not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" is a battle production with a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" are the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2".
In the battle production of, the middle title is displayed, while the battle production pattern "BP-K"
The difference is that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of "-W3".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" is a battle production of a production mode such as weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (win). Is. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of "-K-W1", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W4".

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" is a battle production of a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (win). That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" are the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2".
In the battle effect of, the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W5", the movable body 011SH32 is not operated.

As shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is a battle production in a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → battle (win). In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3" and the battle production pattern "B"
What is the battle production of "P-K-W6"? In the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W3", the movable body 011SH32 is operated, whereas the battle production pattern "BP-K-"
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "W6".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (defeat) →
It is a battle production in a production mode such as relief (win). In other words, the battle production pattern "BP-
In the battle production of "K-W7", a title suggesting the start of a weak battle is displayed (for example, Fig. 1).
The weak title image 011SHJT of 3-5 (A) is displayed), followed by the title suggesting the start of the middle battle (for example, the middle title image 011SHTT of FIG. 13-5 (B) is displayed), and then. Then, a title suggesting the start of a strong battle is displayed (for example, FIG. 13-5 (Fig. 13-5).
The strong title image 011SHKT of C) is displayed), and during the strong battle, the movable body 011SH32 operates as shown in FIG. 13-5 (G), and the defeat is notified as a result of the battle (for example, FIG. 13-5 (H). ) LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed), followed by FIG. 13-5 (J).
), The relief effect is executed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is as follows: medium title → strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) ) Is a battle production. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" are weak titles in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7". While the display is performed, the weak title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" is as follows: strong title → strong battle start → character movement available → battle (loss) → relief (win) It is a battle production of the mode. In other words, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" are the battle production pattern "BP".
The difference is that the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of "-K-W8", whereas the middle title is not displayed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" is as follows: weak title → medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win)
It is a battle production of the production mode such as. In other words, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7"
And the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10", while the movement of the movable body 011SH32 is performed in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7", the battle production pattern Movable body 011SH in the battle production of "BP-K-W10"
The difference is that the operation of 32 is not performed.

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" has a production mode such as medium title → strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). It is a battle production. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" are the battle production pattern ".
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W11", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle effect of the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W11".

As shown in Fig. 13-4 (B), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" is a battle production with a production mode such as strong title → strong battle start → battle (loss) → relief (win). is there. That is, the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" and the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" are the battle production pattern "BP-K-W".
The difference is that the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of "9", whereas the movable body 011SH32 is not operated in the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W12".

In addition, in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20), the battle production of the battle production pattern "BP-K-W1" or the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2"
Battle production, or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W3", or battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W4", or battle production pattern "BP-K"
-W5 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-K-W6 "battle production, or battle production pattern" BP-K-W7 "battle production, or battle production pattern"
Battle production of "BP-K-W8", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W9", battle production of battle production pattern "BP-K-W10", or battle production pattern "BP-" Battle production of "K-W11" or battle production pattern "BP-K-W"
Although it was explained that the battle effect of "12" is executed, specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C), the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W1" is determined at a rate of 15%. The battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" is decided at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K"
-W3 "is determined at a rate of 15%, the battle production pattern" BP-K-W4 "is determined at a rate of 9%, and the battle production pattern" BP-K-W5 "is determined at a rate of 8%. The battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is decided at a rate of 8%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W7" is decided.
Is determined at a rate of 6%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is determined at a rate of 6%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" is determined at a rate of 6%. pattern"
"BP-K-W10" is determined at a rate of 4%, battle production pattern "BP-K-W11" is determined at a rate of 4%, and battle production pattern "BP-K-W12" is determined at a rate of 4%. Decide and
Do one of the decisions you made.

According to FIG. 13-6 (A), the super reach (weak battle) is off (variation pattern # 13).
), The ratio of the battle production ("BP-J-L2") that does not include "character movement" is higher than that of the battle production ("BP-J-L1") that includes "character movement". Is determined by. On the other hand, in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production ("BP-J-W1", "BP-J-W3") including "character movement" is the "role". It is determined at a higher rate than the battle effects (“BP-J-W2”, “BP-J-W4”) that do not include “with motion”. Therefore, the winning expectation (expectation to be a big hit) is higher when the movable body 011SH32 is operated during the weak battle than when the movable body 011SH32 is not operated during the weak battle.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), the degree of expectation of victory (big hit) when the movable body 011SH32 is operated during the middle battle is higher than when the movable body 011SH32 is not operated during the medium battle. Expectation) is high. Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), the movable body 011 during the strong battle.
The victory expectation (expectation to be a big hit) is higher when there is an operation of SH32 than when there is no operation of the movable body 011SH32 during a strong battle.

Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), in the out-of-super reach (medium battle) (variation pattern # 14), the battle effects (BP-T-L2, BP-T-L4) that do not include the "weak title" are included.
) Is determined at a higher rate than the battle effects (BP-T-L1, BP-T-L3) including the "weak title". On the other hand, Super Reach (Medium Battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 19)
), Battle production including "weak title" (BP-T-W1, BP-T-W3, BP-T
-W5, BP-T-W7) and battle production that does not include "weak titles" (BP-T-W2,
The determination ratio is not different from that of BP-T-W4, BP-T-W6, BP-T-W8). Therefore, when the start of the medium battle is suggested and the medium battle is started after the start of the weak battle is suggested (so-called, when the weak battle is changed to the medium battle), the start of the medium battle is started from the beginning. The expectation for victory (expectation for a big hit) is higher than when the middle battle is started as suggested.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), when the start of the medium battle is suggested after the start of the weak battle is suggested, and the start of the strong battle is further suggested and the strong battle is started (weak battle). , Medium battle, strong battle), when the start of strong battle is suggested and the strong battle is started after the start of medium battle is suggested (when it becomes medium battle, strong battle) The expectation for victory (expectation for a big hit) is higher than that. Also, when the start of a strong battle is suggested and the strong battle is started after the start of the medium battle is suggested (when the medium battle and the strong battle are established), the start of the strong battle is suggested from the beginning. The expectation for victory (expectation for a big hit) is higher than when a strong battle is started.

Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (A), in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18), the battle production (“BP-J-W1”, “BP”) that does not include “relief (win)” is included. -J
-W2 ") is the battle production ("BP-J-W3", "BP-J" including "relief (win)"
-W4 ") is determined at a higher rate. Therefore, if you win in a weak battle,
The frequency of winning without bailout is higher than the frequency of winning through bailout.

Similarly, according to FIG. 13-6 (B), when winning in a medium battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning through relief. Further, according to FIG. 13-6 (C), when winning in a strong battle, the frequency of winning without relief is higher than the frequency of winning through relief.

FIG. 13-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the item image effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 011SH can execute an item image effect for displaying an item image.

As the item image displayed in the item image effect, an up-card image 011SHUPC as shown in FIG. 13-7 (A) and a cancel card image 011SHPXLC as shown in FIG. 13-7 (B) are prepared.

Up cards (similar to cancellation cards) are not always acquired (acquired), but may or may not be acquired for each change. The acquired up card (same for cancellation card) is displayed (stocked and displayed) on the screen and used later.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (C), the up card acquisition timing (that is, the stock timing) is immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. The up card is used at the time of re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, and at the time of the rise of the battle.

When the up card is used during re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, the movement when using the up card is that the up card acts on the temporary stop symbol (the stop symbol is changed to the pseudo-continuous symbol (re-variation symbol)). (Change)), and as a result, it is changed again (Fig. 13-9 (H4).
) ~ FIG. 13-9 (L4)). When the up card has a battle rise and is used at the time of the rise, the movement when using the up card is that the up card acts on the title ("weak title" or "medium title") (the title is the upper battle). It is something that is upgraded (changed) to something, and as a result, a battle production is completed (Fig. 13-11 (C3).
) ~ FIG. 13-11 (F3)). In addition, whether or not to acquire an up card, acquisition timing,
The method of determining the usage scene and the like will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 13-7 (C), the cancellation card acquisition timing (that is, the stocking timing) is immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. The cancellation card is used at the time of re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, at the time of the rise of the battle with the rise, and at the time of the relief in the case of the relief.

When the cancel card is used during re-variation in the case of pseudo-continuous possession, the movement when using the cancel card is that the cancel card acts on the temporary stop symbol (cancels the stop of the symbol), and as a result, it re-variates. (Fig. 13-9 (H5) to Fig. 13-9
(L5)). When the cancellation card has a battle rise and is used at the time of the rise, the movement when using the cancel card is the title of the cancel card (
It acts on "weak titles" and "medium titles" (cancels the title), resulting in a battle effect (Figs. 13-11 (C4) to 13-11 (F).
See 4)). When the cancellation card is used for relief when there is relief, the movement when using the cancellation card acts on the result of the battle (cancels the result of defeat), and as a result, the relief effect is executed. (Fig. 13-12 (Fig. 13-12)
C2) to FIG. 13-12 (G2)). The method of determining whether or not to acquire the cancellation card, the acquisition timing, the usage scene, etc. will be described later.

FIG. 13-8 is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. In FIG. 13-8, an example of the effect operation is described for three types of flows. First, FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-
8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D) → FIG. 13-8 (E1) → FIG. 13-8 (F)
The flow of 1) is an example of an effect operation in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and fanned, but the pseudo-continuous symbol does not stop and is out of alignment. Secondly, FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D) → FIG. 13-8 (E2) → FIG. 13-8 ( The flow of F2) is an example of an effect operation in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and fanned, but the pseudo-continuous symbol does not stop and develops into a super reach. Thirdly, FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (D) → FIG. 13-8 (E3) → FIG. 13-8 ( The flow of F3) is an example of an effect operation in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped.

FIG. 13-8 (A) is a scene immediately before the reach of the symbol “7”. FIG. 13-8 (B)
Is the scene that became the reach of the symbol "7". FIG. 13-8 (C) is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped in the middle symbol or the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped. Figure 13-8 (
D) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is stopped or the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped in the middle symbol.

FIG. 13-8 (E1) is a scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), and the symbol "6" is used as the middle symbol.
Is the scene just before the stop. FIG. 13-8 (F1) is a scene in which the symbol “6” is stopped as the middle symbol. In other words, it is a scene that is out of normal reach. However, Fig. 13-8
The scene (F1) appears not only in the scene where the normal reach is lost, but also in the scene where the item is used as described later (see FIG. 13-9).

FIG. 13-8 (E2) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), in which the stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” was denied as the middle symbol (the stop of the symbol “6” was also denied). It is a scene. Figure 13-8 (
F2) is a scene in which the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed and develops into super reach.

FIG. 13-8 (E3) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (D), and is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped as the middle symbol. FIG. 13-8 (F3) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is stopped as the middle symbol. That is, although the illustration is omitted, the revariable display is performed following FIG. 13-8 (F3).

FIG. 13-9 is an example of an effect operation related to the pseudo-continuous advance notice effect. In FIG. 13-9, FIG. 13
As a scene following -8 (F1), an example of the production operation is explained for two types of flows. First, following FIG. 13-8 (F1), FIG. 13-9 (G4) → FIG. 13-9 (H4) → FIG.
The flow of 3-9 (I4)-> FIG. 13-9 (J4)-> FIG. 13-9 (K4)-> FIG. 13-9 (L4) is an example of the effect operation when the up card is used and the fluctuation occurs again. .. Second, Fig. 1
Following 3-8 (F1), FIG. 13-9 (G5) → FIG. 13-9 (H5) → FIG. 13-9 (I5).
→ The flow of FIG. 13-9 (J5) → FIG. 13-9 (K5) → FIG. 13-9 (L5) is an example of an effect operation when a cancel card is used and the fluctuation occurs again.

FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a scene following FIG. 13-8 (F1), and is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is displayed. In addition, when it does not follow FIG. 13-9 (G4) (when it becomes out of normal reach), FIG. 13-8
The middle symbol "6" in (F1) stops deterministically, but continues to FIG. 13-9 (G4) (
The middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) of FIG. 13-8 (F1) in FIG. 13-8 (F1) does not stop definitively (for example, it is slightly shaken). That is, the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) when following FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a temporary stop symbol.

FIG. 13-9 (H4) is a scene in which the up card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although details will be described later, the up card may be used after it has been acquired (stocked) (that is, when the stocked up card is used), or it may be used even though it has not been acquired (stocked). In some cases (used when there is no stock of upcards).

FIG. 13-9 (I4) is a scene in which the up card acts on the symbol “6” which is the temporary stop symbol. Specifically, the upcard image 011SHU is placed on the temporary stop symbol "6".
The PCs are overlaid and displayed. In FIG. 13-9 (J4), the symbol “6” on which the up card has acted.
Is the scene where FIG. 13-9 (K4) is a scene immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” stops. FIG. 13-9 (L4) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” has stopped. That is, in FIGS. 13-9 (H4) to 13-9 (L4), the scene in which the up card acts on the temporary stop symbol "6" (the scene in which the stop symbol "6" is upgraded to the pseudo-continuous symbol "re"). Is. Although not shown, the revariable display is performed following FIG. 13-9 (L4).

FIG. 13-9 (G5) is another scene following FIG. 13-8 (F1), in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is displayed. Note that the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) in the case of not following FIG. 13-9 (G5) (when the normal reach is lost) is definitively stopped, but in FIG. 13-9 (G5). In the following case (when the cancellation card is used later), the middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) does not stop deterministically (for example, it is slightly shaken). That is, FIG. 13-9 (G)
The middle symbol "6" in FIG. 13-8 (F1) in the case following 5) is a temporary stop symbol.

FIG. 13-9 (H5) is a scene in which the cancellation card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHPXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen. Although details will be described later, the cancellation card may be used after it has been acquired (stocked) (that is, when the stocked cancellation card is used), or it may be used even though it has not been acquired (stocked). In some cases (used when there is no stock of cancellation cards).

FIG. 13-9 (I5) is a scene in which the cancel card acts on the symbol “6” which is the temporary stop symbol. Specifically, the cancel card image 01 is placed on the temporary stop symbol "6".
1SHCXLC is superimposed and displayed. FIG. 13-9 (J5) is a scene immediately before the symbol “6” on which the cancel card acts is canceled (destroyed, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (K5) is a scene in which the symbol “6” is canceled (destroyed, etc.). FIG. 13-9 (L5) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” is displayed in place of the canceled (destroyed, etc.) symbol “6”.
That is, in FIGS. 13-9 (H5) to 13-9 (L5), the cancel card is temporarily stopped.
It is a scene that acted on "6" (a scene in which the stop of the symbol "6" was canceled and replaced with the pseudo-continuous symbol "re"). Although not shown, the revariable display is performed following FIG. 13-9 (L5).

The execution mode of the pseudo-continuous fanning effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the reach symbol (FIG. 1).
In the examples of 3-8 and 13-9, the symbol "7") and the symbol immediately before the reach symbol (FIG. 13-8)
In the example of FIGS. 13-9, the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is inserted between the symbols "6") to execute the pseudo-continuous fanning effect. Therefore, for example, when the reach symbol is "3", the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is inserted between the reach symbol "3" and the symbol "2" immediately before the reach symbol to produce a pseudo-continuous fanning effect (for example). , In the scene of FIG. 13-8 (D), an effect of inciting whether the middle symbol becomes the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” or the symbol “2”) is executed.

FIG. 13-10 is an example of an effect operation related to the title display of the battle effect. Figure 13-1
In 0, an example of the production operation is explained for two types of flows. First, FIG. 13-10
(A) → The flow of FIG. 13-10 (B1) is an example of an effect operation when a weak battle is started. Secondly, the flow of FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-10 (B2) → FIG. 13-10 (C2) is an example of the effect operation when the middle battle is started.

FIG. 13-10 (A) is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is displayed. Figure 1
3-10 (B1) is a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a weak battle start image 011.
This is the scene where SHJBS is displayed. Although not shown, a weak battle with the character A will be performed following FIG. 13-10 (B1).

FIG. 13-10 (B2) is another scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed. FIG. 13-10 (C2) shows the middle battle start image 0.
This is the scene where 11SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, FIG. 13-10 (C2)
), A medium battle with character B will be held. That is, FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-
The flow from 10 (B2) to FIG. 13-10 (C2) shows a scene in which a weak battle is changed to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 is an example of an effect operation related to the title display of the battle effect. Figure 13-1
In No. 1, as a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), an example of the production operation is described for two types of flows. First, following FIG. 13-10 (A), FIG. 13-11 (B3) → FIG. 13-
11 (C3) → FIG. 13-11 (D3) → FIG. 13-11 (E3) → FIG. 13-11 (F3) →
The flow of FIG. 13-11 (G3) is an example of the production operation when the up card is used and the battle changes from a weak battle to a medium battle. Second, FIG. 13-1 follows FIG. 13-10 (A).
1 (B4) → Fig. 13-11 (C4) → Fig. 13-11 (D4) → Fig. 13-11 (E4) → Fig. 13-11 (F4) → Fig. 13-11 (G4) Is used, and it is an example of the production operation when it goes from a weak battle to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 (B3) is another scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (C3) is a scene in which the up card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the up-card image 011SHUPC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-11 (D3) shows a scene in which the up card acts on a weak title. Specifically, the upcard image 011SHUPC is superimposed on the weak title image 011SHJT.

FIG. 13-11 (E3) is a scene in which the weak title on which the up card acts has changed.
Specifically, instead of the weak title image 011SHJT, the weak title image 011SHJT
T is displayed. Weak medium title image 011SHJTT is weak title image 011SHJ
It is a title image between T and the middle title image 011SHTT (on the way from the weak title image 011SHJT to the middle title image 011SHTT). That is, the weak title image 011SHJT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character A and the expectation of victory is one star, and the medium title image 011SHJT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character B. Although it is displayed that the expected degree of victory is two stars, the weak title image 011SHJTT displays that the opponent of the battle is character A and that the expected degree of victory is two stars.

In addition, FIG. 13-11 (E3) shows a weak title image 01 between the weak title image 011SHJT and the medium title image 011SHTT when the up card acts on the weak title.
An example in which 1SHJTT is displayed is shown, but when the up card acts on the medium title, the medium strong title image 011SHTKT between the medium title image 011SHTT and the strong title image 011SHKT (see FIG. 13-30 (F)). ) Is displayed. That is, the medium title image 011SHTT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character B and the expectation of victory is two stars, and the strong title image 011SHKT indicates that the opponent of the battle is character C. Although it is displayed that the expectation of victory is 3 stars, the medium-strength title image 011SHTKT displays that the opponent of the battle is character B and that the expectation of victory is 3 stars.

FIG. 13-11 (F3) is a scene in which the middle title is displayed. Specifically, the medium title image 011SHJTT is displayed instead of the weak medium title image 011SHJTT. FIG. 13-11 (G3) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a medium battle with the character B will be performed following FIG. 13-11 (G3). That is, FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-11 (B3) → FIG. 13-11 (C3) → FIG.
3-11 (D3) → Fig. 13-11 (E3) → Fig. 13-11 (F3) → Fig. 13-11 (G3)
The flow of) shows the scene where the up card is used and the battle goes from a weak battle to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-11 (B4) is a scene following FIG. 13-10 (A), and is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-11 (C4) is a scene in which the cancellation card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHPXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-11 (D4) shows a scene in which the cancel card acts on a weak title. Specifically, on the weak title image 011SHJT, the cancel card image 011SHCXL
C is superimposed and displayed.

FIG. 13-11 (E4) is a scene in which the weak title on which the cancel card acts is canceled. Specifically, it is a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is destroyed. FIG. 13-11 (F4) is a scene in which the middle title is displayed. Specifically, the medium title image 011SHTTT is displayed instead of the destroyed weak title image 011SHJTT. FIG. 13-11 (G4) is a scene in which the middle battle start image 011SHTBS is displayed. Although not shown, a medium battle with the character B will be performed following FIG. 13-11 (G4). That is, FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-11 (B4) → FIG. 13-11 (C).
4) → Fig. 13-11 (D4) → Fig. 13-11 (E4) → Fig. 13-11 (F4) → Fig. 13-
The flow of 11 (G4) represents a scene in which a cancel card is used and the battle changes from a weak battle to a medium battle.

FIG. 13-12 is an example of an effect operation related to the relief effect. In FIG. 13-12, an example of the effect operation is described for the two flows. First, FIG. 13-12 (A) → FIG. 13-
12 (B1) → FIG. 13-12 (C1) → FIG. 13-12 (D1) → FIG. 13-12 (E1) →
The flow of FIG. 13-12 (F1) is an example of an effect operation when the relief effect is executed without using the cancel card (and the up card is not used). Second, FIG. 13
-12 (A) → Fig. 13-12 (B2) → Fig. 13-12 (C2) → Fig. 13-12 (D2) →
The flow of FIG. 13-12 (E2) → FIG. 13-12 (F2) → FIG. 13-12 (G2) is an example of an effect operation when a cancel card is used and a relief effect is executed.

FIG. 13-12 (A) is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 is displayed. Figure 1
3-12 (B1) is a scene following FIG. 13-12 (A), and is a LOSE image 011SH.
This is a scene where KH1 is destroyed. FIG. 13-12 (C1) is a scene in which a friendly character stands up. FIG. 13-12 (D1) shows a scene in which a friendly character is fighting back. FIG. 13-12 (E1) is a scene after the ally character makes the final blow. Figure 1
3-12 (F1) is a scene in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 is displayed.

FIG. 13-12 (B2) is another scene following FIG. 13-12 (A), in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is displayed. FIG. 13-12 (C2) is a scene in which the cancellation card is notified that it will be used. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHPXLC is displayed large in the center of the screen.

FIG. 13-12 (D2) is a scene in which the cancel card acts on the LOSE image 011SHKH1. Specifically, the cancel card image 011SHXLC is superimposed on the LOSE image 011SHKH1. FIG. 13-12 (E2) shows the LOSE image 0.
This is a scene where 11SHKH1 is destroyed. FIG. 13-12 (F2) is a scene after the ally character makes the final blow. FIG. 13-11 (G2) shows the WIN image 011S.
This is the scene where HKH2 is displayed.

FIG. 13-13 is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of an item targeting relief.
As mentioned above, in the case of super reach (variation patterns # 13 to # 15, # 18 to #
In 20), a battle effect is performed (see FIG. 13-1), and the mode of the battle effect (battle effect pattern) is determined for each variation pattern (FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, 13-6). reference)
.. The battle production patterns including "relief (win)" are "BP-J-W3" and "BP-J-W4" in the super reach (weak battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 18) in FIG. 13-3 (B).
And the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 1) shown in Fig. 13-3 (D).
4 of "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8" in 9) and "BP-K-W7" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20) in Fig. 13-4 (B). "~
There are six of "BP-K-W12". When these battle effect patterns are determined, the relief effect is executed. FIG. 13-13 shows the case where the relief effect is executed (that is, “BP-”.
"J-W3", "BP-J-W4", "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8", "BP-
The determination ratio (one example) of the presence or absence of an item in (when any one of "K-W7" to "BP-K-W12" is determined) is shown.

In FIG. 13-13, the "presence / absence of use" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column indicates whether or not the item (up card, cancellation card) is used in executing the relief effect. is there. "Not used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will not be used when executing the relief effect, and "Used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will be used when executing the relief effect.

In FIG. 13-13, the “acquisition / non-acquisition” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column indicates the acquisition (stock) of the item when the item is used when executing the relief effect. ) Is present or absent. "Not acquired" in the decision content column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the presence or absence of use is "used", and "acquired" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used. Indicates that the item to be used will be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In FIG. 13-13, the "type" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the type of the item when the item to be used when executing the relief effect is acquired. .. "Up card" in the decision content column indicates that an up card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition", and the "cancellation card" in the decision content column Indicates that a cancellation card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIG. 13-13, the "acquisition timing" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the timing of acquisition when the item to be used when executing the relief effect is acquired. Is. "Immediately after the start of fluctuation" in the decision content column indicates that the product will be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition". "Immediately after" indicates that the acquisition is performed immediately after the reach when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIG. 13-13, the "acquisition number" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the quantity of the acquisition when the item to be used when executing the relief effect is acquired. is there. "1 card" in the decision content column indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". There is.

In other words, the decision items in the decision content column ("Used", "Used, Not acquired", "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Upcard" , Immediately after reach, 1 card ”,“ Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card ”,“ used,
Of "acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used when executing the relief effect. That is, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used when the relief effect is executed, and the relief effect is simply executed. It should be noted that FIG. 13-12 (A) → FIG. 13-12 (B1) → FIG. 13-12 (C1) → FIG. 13-12.
The flow of (D1) → FIG. 13-12 (E1) → FIG. 13-12 (F1) is an example of an effect operation when the relief effect is simply executed.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) when the relief effect is executed. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used when executing the relief effect without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item used is a cancellation card.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect.
Immediately after the start of the fluctuation, one up card is acquired (stocked), and it is indicated that the up card will be used when executing the relief effect. However, the decision rate is 0%.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the up card is used when executing the relief effect. Indicates that it will be done. However, the decision rate is 0%.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of the change, one card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one cancel card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and the cancel card is used when the relief effect is executed. Indicates that

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the relief effect, and one cancel card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the cancel card is used when executing the relief effect. Indicates that it will be done.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-13, "not used" is determined at a rate of 1%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 9%, and "used / acquired / upcard," Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 sheet is 0
Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" determined at a rate of 0%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" Determined at a rate of 75%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 15%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-13, the cancel card may be used when executing the relief effect, but the up card may not be used. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when performing the relief effect. When executing the relief effect, the rate at which the cancel card is used is 99%, the rate at which the up card is used is 0%, and the rate at which neither the up card nor the cancel card is used is 1.
%. That is, when the relief effect is executed, the cancellation card is used very frequently (99%) when the relief effect is executed.

In addition, the item (specifically, the cancellation card) used when executing the relief effect,
It may or may not be acquired (stocked) or not (used without acquisition). When using an item (cancellation card) when executing a relief effect, the ratio of acquiring the item (cancellation card) is about 91% (90/99), and the ratio of not acquiring the item (cancellation card) is about. It is 9% (9/99). That is, when the item (cancellation card) is used when executing the relief effect, the item (cancellation card) is acquired at a very high frequency (about 91%).

In addition, when acquiring an item (cancellation card) used when executing a relief effect, the item (cancellation card) may be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach. When acquiring the item (cancellation card) used when executing the relief effect, the ratio of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is about 83% (75/90),
The rate of acquisition immediately after reach is about 17% (15/90). That is, when acquiring an item (cancellation card) used when executing a relief effect, the frequency of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is higher than the frequency of acquisition immediately after reach.

FIG. 13-14 is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of items targeting the completion of the battle. As mentioned above, when it becomes super reach (variation pattern # 13 to # 15)
, # 18 to # 20), a battle effect is performed (see Fig. 13-1), and a mode of the battle effect (see FIG. 13-1).
The battle effect pattern) is determined for each fluctuation pattern (FIGS. 13-3, 13-4, 1).
See 3-6). The battle production pattern including "weak title-> medium title" or "medium title-> strong title" is "BP-TL1" in Fig. 13-3 (C), which is out of the super reach (medium battle) (variation pattern # 14). , "BP-TL3" and FIG. 13-3 (D)
) Super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) "BP-TW
1 ”,“ BP-T-W3 ”,“ BP-T-W5 ”,“ BP-T-W7 ”, and FIG.
-4 (A) "BP" in the out-of-super reach (strong battle) (variation pattern # 15)
-K-L1 "," BP-K-L2 "," BP-K-L4 "," BP-K-L5 "and the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation) shown in Fig. 13-4 (B). "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W2", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W5" in pattern # 20)
, "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-W8", "BP-K-W10", "BP-K-W1"
There are eight of "1". When these battle production patterns are determined, the battle is completed. FIG. 13-14 shows a determination ratio (one example) of the presence or absence of items when the battle is completed.

FIG. 13-14 (A) is an example of a determination ratio of the presence or absence of an item, etc., when the number of battles is one and the item for which relief is targeted is not acquired. Figure 13-1
4 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of the item, etc., when the number of battles has been completed once and the item has been acquired for the purpose of relief. FIG. 13-14 (C) shows
This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of items, etc., when the number of battles is 2 times and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired. FIG. 13-14 (D) is an example of a determination ratio of the presence or absence of an item, etc., when the number of battles has been completed twice and the item for which relief is targeted has been acquired.

The number of battles that occur once corresponds to the case where the weak title is displayed first in the middle battle and the case where the middle title is displayed first in the strong battle. Specifically, "BP-T-L1" and "BP-T-L3" in the outlier (variation pattern # 14) of the super reach (medium battle) in FIG. 13-3 (C) and FIG. 13-3. "BP-T-W1" and "BP" in the super reach (medium battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 19) of (D)
-T-W3 "," BP-T-W5 "," BP-T-W7 ", and" BP- KL2 "
, "BP-K-L5" and "BP-K-W2", "BP-K-W5" in the super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20) in Fig. 13-4 (B), "BP-K
-W8 "and" BP-K-W11 ".

Two battles occur when a strong battle is displayed but a weak title is displayed first. Specifically, "BP-K-L1" and "BP-K-L4" in the outlier (variation pattern # 15) of the super reach (strong battle) in FIG. 13-4 (A) and FIG. 13-4. "(B) Super reach (strong battle) jackpot (variation pattern # 20)"
There are four types, "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W7", and "BP-K-W10".

The case of not acquiring an item targeting relief corresponds to the case where the relief is not performed and the case where the relief is performed but the item is not acquired (stocked) targeting the relief.
When you make a relief but do not stock the item for the relief, specifically,
Decision items in Fig. 13-13 ("Not used", "Used, Not acquired", "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Reach" Immediately after, one piece "
, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used", "used, not acquired""Is determined.

The acquisition of items targeting relief corresponds to the case of stocking items for relief. Specifically, the determination items in Fig. 13-13 (“Not used”, “Used, Not acquired”, “Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card”, “Used, Acquired” , Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card ”,“ Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card ”,“ Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card ”) Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card "," used, acquired, up card,
"Immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "
This is the case when "Used, Acquired, Canceled Card, Immediately After Reach, 1 Card" is decided. However, as described above, the determination ratios of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" are both set to 0%. There is.

In FIG. 13-14, "whether or not to use" in the "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is whether or not to use the item (up card, cancel card) at the beginning of the battle. .. "Not used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will not be used at the start of the battle, and "Used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will be used at the start of the battle.

In FIG. 13-14, "whether or not to acquire" in the "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column indicates the acquisition (stock) of the item when the item is used at the start of the battle. Presence or absence. "No acquisition" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used.
In the case of "Used", it indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked), and "Acquired" in the decision content column will acquire the item to be used (stock) when the presence or absence of use is "Used". ).

In FIG. 13-14, the “type” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column is the type of the item when the item to be used at the start of the battle is acquired. For "up card" in the decision content column, whether or not it is used is "used",
When the presence or absence of acquisition is "acquisition available", it indicates that an up card will be acquired, and the "cancellation card" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used is "used" and whether or not it is acquired is "acquired".
In the case of, it indicates that a cancellation card will be obtained.

In FIG. 13-14, the “acquisition timing” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column is the timing of acquisition when the item to be used at the start of the battle is acquired. .. "Immediately after the start of fluctuation" in the decision content column indicates that the product will be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition". "Immediately after" means "Used" for use and "Used" for acquisition.
In the case of "acquisition available", it indicates that the acquisition will be made immediately after the reach.

In FIG. 13-14, the “acquisition number” in the “presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions” column is the number of acquisitions when the item to be used at the start of the battle is acquired. "1 card" in the decision content column indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". For "2 cards" in the decision content column, 2 cards (2 up cards or 2 cancellation cards) are used when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired". Indicates that it will be acquired.

That is, in FIG. 13-14 (A) (the same applies to FIG. 13-14 (B)), the decision items (“not used”, “used, not acquired”, “used, with acquisition,” in the determination content column. Up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, Of "acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used at the start of one battle. In other words, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used for the completion of one battle, and only one battle is completed. .. Note that the flow of FIG. 13-10 (A) → FIG. 13-10 (B2) → FIG. 13-10 (C2) is an example of an effect operation when only one battle is completed and executed.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item will be used but the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) at the start of one battle. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used at the beginning of one battle without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item used is an up card.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of the change, 1 card" is related to the start of one battle, and one upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and when the start of one battle , Indicates that the up card is used.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the completion of one battle, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when one battle is completed, the said Indicates that an up card will be used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of the change, 1 card" is related to the start of one battle, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and when one battle starts. , Indicates that the cancellation card will be used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the completion of one battle, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when one battle is completed, the said Indicates that a cancellation card will be used.

Further, in FIG. 13-14 (C) (the same applies to FIG. 13-14 (D)), the decision items in the decision content column (“not used”, “used, not acquired”, “used, with acquisition,” Up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Used, With acquisition, cancellation card,
"Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards", "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card", "
Of the "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards"), "not used" indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used when the two battles are completed. In other words, there is no need to acquire (stock) items immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reach.
In addition, it indicates that the first and second battles are simply executed without using any items at the time of the first and second battles.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item will be used but the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the two battles are completed. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used at the beginning of the first and second battles without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item to be used is an up card both for the first time and for the second time.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the start of two battles, and one upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the first and second times. It indicates that an up card will be used when the battle starts. Specifically, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, stock one up card to be used when the first battle starts.
One up card used for the completion of the second battle will not be stocked.
Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked up cards are used,
In the second battle, up cards that are not in stock are used.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the completion of 2 battles, and 1 upcard is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the 1st and 2nd battles It indicates that an up card will be used at the time of the start-up. Specifically, immediately after the reach, one up card used for the first battle is stocked, and one up card used for the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked upcards are used, and in the second battle, the unstocked upcards are used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the start of two battles, and one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the first and second times. It indicates that a cancellation card will be used when the battle is completed. Specifically, the cancellation card 1 used when the first battle is completed immediately after the start of fluctuation.
Stock one card and do not stock one cancellation card used for the second battle. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked cancellation card is used, and in the second battle, the unstocked cancellation card is used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of the change, 2 cards" is related to the start of the 2 battles, and 2 canceled cards are acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the change, and the 1st and 2nd times It indicates that a cancellation card will be used when the battle is completed. Specifically, the cancellation card 1 used when the first battle is completed immediately after the start of fluctuation.
Stock a total of 2 cards, 1 card and 1 cancellation card to be used when the second battle is completed. Therefore, whether it is the first battle or the second battle
The canceled card in stock is used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the completion of 2 battles, and 1 canceled card is acquired (stocked) immediately after reach, and the 1st and 2nd
It indicates that a cancellation card will be used when the first battle is completed. Specifically, immediately after the reach, one cancellation card used for the first battle is stocked, and one cancellation card used for the second battle is not stocked. Therefore, in the first battle, the stocked cancellation card is used, and in the second battle, the unstocked cancellation card is used.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is related to the completion of the 2 battles, and 2 canceled cards are acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and the 1st and 2nd
It indicates that a cancellation card will be used when the first battle is completed. Specifically, immediately after reaching, one cancellation card to be used when the first battle is completed,
Stock a total of two cards, one cancellation card to be used when the second battle is completed. Therefore, the stock cancellation card is used in both the first battle and the second battle.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), when the number of battles is 1 and the item whose target is relief is not acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and """Used,acquired" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
"1 card" is decided at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card"
Is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 30%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card". 1
Determined at a rate of 0%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (B), when the number of battles is 1 and the item for which relief is targeted is acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and """Used,acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
"1 card" is decided at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card"
Is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 40%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card". 2
Determined at a rate of 0%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), when the number of battles is 2 times and the item whose target is relief is not acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and """Used,acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
"1 card" is decided at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card"
Was determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2". "Number of cards" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is 25
Determined at a rate of%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is determined at a rate of 5%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), when the number of battles is 2 times and the item for which relief is targeted is acquired, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and """Used,acquired" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
"1 card" is decided at a rate of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card"
Is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2" 2 "sheets"
Determined at a rate of 5%, "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card" 5%
"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is determined at a ratio of 25%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-14, the up card may be used or the cancel card may be used when executing the battle rise. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing the battle. As an example, FIG.
In the case of the example shown in 3-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired), when the battle rise is executed, the battle rise is increased. The percentage of cards used is 55%, the percentage of canceled cards used is 40%, and the percentage of neither up cards nor canceled cards used is 5%.

In addition, there are cases where items (up cards, cancellation cards) used when executing the battle are acquired (stock) or not (when used without acquisition). As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and the item for which relief is not acquired is not acquired), the item (up card) is executed when the battle rise is executed. , Cancel card), the ratio of acquiring the item is about 58% (55/95), and the ratio of not acquiring the item is about 42.
% (40/95).

In addition, when acquiring an item (up card, cancellation card) to be used when executing the battle, the item (up card, cancellation card) is used.
It may be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation, or it may be acquired immediately after reach. As an example, FIG.
In the case of the example shown in -14 (A) (when the number of battle rises is 1 and the item that targets relief is not acquired), the item used when executing the battle rise (
When acquiring an up card or a cancel card), the ratio of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is about 73% (40/55), and the ratio of acquisition immediately after reach is about 27% (15/55).

13-15 and 13-16 are examples of determination ratios such as the presence / absence of items targeting pseudo-reams. As described above, the presence / absence and the number of pseudo-reams are determined according to the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 13-2). 13-15 and 13-16 show the determination ratio (example) of the presence / absence of an item, etc. when it is determined that the item is pseudo-continuous (1 pseudo-ream, 2 pseudo-ream, or 3 pseudo-ream). There is.

FIG. 13-15 (A) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of normal reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession. FIG. 13-15 (B) shows the normal reach (big hit).
, This is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of items in the case of pseudo-continuous possession. Figure 13-16 (
A) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence or absence of items in the case of super reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession. FIG. 13-16 (B) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2. FIG. 13-16 (C) is an example of the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items, etc. in the case of super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and the number of canceled cards acquired is three.

"Number of canceled cards acquired" in FIGS. 13-16 (B) and 13-16 (C)
Is the total number of cancellation cards acquired, which is the sum of the number of cancellation cards acquired targeting the start of the battle and the number of cancellation cards acquired targeting relief. That is, it is the number of canceled cards acquired by targeting other than the pseudo-ren. In the battle production in the super reach (big hit), both the battle start and the relief production may be executed. The number of canceled cards acquired as the target for the start of battle is 0 to 2 (see FIG. 13-14), and the number of acquired cancellation cards targeted for relief is 0 to 1 (see FIG. 13-13). In other words, super reach (big hit)
In the case of, the number of cancellation cards acquired by targeting other than the pseudo-ren is 0 to 3. If three cancellation cards are acquired by targeting a non-pseudo-ren and one cancel card is acquired by targeting a pseudo-ream, the total number of cancellation cards acquired will be four, but four cancellation cards will be acquired. The acquisition of the above means that the cancellation card targeting the relief has been acquired, and the relief effect will be executed at a relatively early stage. In order to prevent future burr, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), when "the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2", the acquisition of cancellation cards is permitted, while as shown in FIG. 13-16 (C). In the case of "when the number of cancellation cards acquired is 3," the acquisition of cancellation cards is restricted (0%).

In the battle effect in Super Reach (off), the relief effect is not executed, so 0 to 2 cancellation cards are acquired as targets other than the pseudo-ren. Therefore, there is no pre-barre, so no restrictions are applied. Also, in normal reach (off, big hit), the battle production itself is not performed, so there is no restriction.

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, "whether or not to use" in the "whether or not to use, whether or not to acquire, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the item (up card, cancel card) in the pseudo-ream. Whether or not it is used. "Not used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will not be used when executing the pseudo-ren, and "used" in the decision content column indicates that the item will be used when executing the pseudo-ren.

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, "presence / absence of acquisition" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case where the item is used when executing the pseudo-ream. Whether or not an item has been acquired (stocked). "Not acquired" in the decision content column indicates that the item to be used will not be acquired (stocked) when the presence or absence of use is "used", and "acquired" in the decision content column indicates whether or not it is used. Indicates that the item to be used will be acquired (stocked) when is "used".

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, the "type" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" column is the case of acquiring the item to be used when executing the pseudo-ream. The type of item. "Up card" in the decision content column indicates that an up card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition", and the "cancellation card" in the decision content column Indicates that a cancellation card will be acquired when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, the "acquisition timing" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case of acquiring the item to be used when executing the pseudo-ream. It is the timing of the acquisition. "Immediately after the start of fluctuation" in the decision content column indicates that the product will be acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquisition". "Immediately after" indicates that the acquisition is performed immediately after the reach when the presence / absence of use is "used" and the presence / absence of acquisition is "acquired".

In FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16, the "acquisition number" in the "presence / absence of use, presence / absence of acquisition, type, timing of acquisition, number of acquisitions" is the case of acquiring the item to be used when executing the pseudo-ream. The quantity of the acquisition. "1 sheet" in the decision content column is "used" whether or not it is used
, Indicates that one card (up card or cancellation card) will be acquired when the presence or absence of acquisition is "acquisition available".

That is, FIGS. 13-15 (A) (FIGS. 13-15 (B), FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-1.
In 6 (C) as well), the decision items in the decision content column (“not used”, “used, not acquired”
, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "Yes, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", "Yes, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1
"No use" out of "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1")
Indicates that neither the up card nor the cancel card will be used when executing the pseudo-ream. In other words, it indicates that the item is not acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach, and the item is not used when executing the pseudo-ren, and the pseudo-ren is simply executed. It should be noted that FIG. 13-8 (A) → FIG. 13-8 (B) → FIG. 13-8 (C) → FIG. 13-8 (
The flow of D) → FIG. 13-8 (E3) → FIG. 13-8 (F3) is simply an example of an effect operation when a pseudo-ream is executed.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item for the first time or the second time. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item for the first, second, and third times.

"Used, not acquired" indicates that the item is used but the item to be used is not acquired (stocked) when the pseudo-ream is executed. In other words, it indicates that the item will be used when executing the pseudo-ream without acquiring (stocking) the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after reaching. The item used is an up card.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the item (up card), and the second time the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the item (up card), and the second and third times the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ream.
Immediately after the start of fluctuation, one up card is acquired (stocked), and it is indicated that the up card will be used when executing the pseudo-ream.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock up card, and the second time the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stocked upcard, and the second and third times the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ren, and one up card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when the pseudo-ren is executed, the up card is acquired. Indicates that

In the case of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card", as in the case of "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", the pseudo-ream is performed twice. In the case of 3 times, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock up card, and after that, the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ream, and when the pseudo-ream is executed, one cancellation card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the start of the fluctuation. Indicates that a cancellation card will be used.

In the super reach (FIGS. 13-16 (A) to 13-16 (C)), the pseudo-ream may be 2 times or the pseudo-ream 3 times (see FIG. 13-2), but the pseudo-ream is 2 times. In the case of, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock cancel card, and the second time the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item. In the case of three pseudo-reams, the first time the pseudo-ream is executed using the stock cancel card, and the second and third times the pseudo-ream is simply executed without using the item.

"Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is related to the execution of the pseudo-ream, and one cancel card is acquired (stocked) immediately after the reach, and when the pseudo-ream is executed, the cancel card is obtained. Indicates that

In the case of "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card", as in the case of "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", the pseudo-ream is performed twice. 3
In the case of times, the first time, the pseudo-ream is executed using the canceled card in stock,
After that, just execute the pseudo-ream without using the item.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A), in the case of normal reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used / not acquired" is 12%. Determined by the ratio of "
"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 26%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 47%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (B), in the case of normal reach (big hit) and pseudo-continuous possession, "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used / not acquired" is 15%. Determined by the ratio of "
"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 45%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (A), in the case of super reach (off) and pseudo-continuous possession, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, and "used / not acquired" is 11 Determined at a rate of%, "
"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 26%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 47%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. ..

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (B), super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and
If the number of cancellation cards obtained is 0 to 2, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%.
"Used, acquired," was determined at a rate of 14%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, up". "Card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 45%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, "used, acquired, available, Cancel card, immediately after reach, 1
"Sheet" is determined at a rate of 8%.

According to the example shown in FIG. 13-16 (C), super reach (big hit), pseudo-continuous possession, and
When the number of canceled cards acquired is 3, "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, and "used / acquired / up". "Card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1"
"Number of cards" is determined at a rate of 55%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1"
"Number of cards" is determined at a rate of 0%, and "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card"
Is determined at a rate of 0%.

According to the examples shown in FIGS. 13-15 and 16, an up card may be used or a cancel card may be used when executing the pseudo-ream. In addition, neither the up card nor the cancel card may be used when executing the pseudo-ream. As an example, FIG. 13-15 (A)
In the case of the example shown in (in the case of normal reach (off)), when executing the pseudo-ream, the rate of using the up card is 85% and the rate of using the cancel card is 10 when executing the pseudo-ream. %, The ratio that neither up card nor cancel card is used is 5%.

In addition, there are cases where the items (up card, cancel card) used when executing the pseudo-ream are acquired (stock) or not (when used without acquisition).
As an example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 13-15 (A) (in the case of normal reach (off)), when the item (up card, cancel card) is used when executing the pseudo-ream, the item is used. The rate of acquisition is about 87% (83/95), and the rate of not acquiring the item is about 13% (12/95).

In addition, when acquiring an item (up card, cancel card) to be used when executing a pseudo-ream, even if the item (up card, cancel card) is acquired immediately after the start of fluctuation, it is acquired immediately after reach. In some cases. As an example, FIG. 13-15 (A)
In the case of the example shown in) (in the case of normal reach (off)), when acquiring the items (up card, cancel card) used when executing the pseudo-ream, the ratio of acquisition immediately after the start of fluctuation is about 34. % (28/83), the rate of acquisition immediately after reach is about 66% (5)
5/83).

13-17 and 13-18 are explanatory views for explaining various timings. Specifically, FIGS. 13-17 (A) and 13-17 (B) are explanatory diagrams for explaining execution timings and the like of various effects in the variable display that is super reach (off). Figure 13-17
(B) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17 (A).

In FIG. 13-17 (A), T0 is the start timing of the variable display. T1 sets the item (up card, cancel card) to "immediately after the start of fluctuation (Fig. 13-13 to Fig. 13-).
16) ”is the timing of acquisition of the item in the case of acquisition (stock). Since the acquired item is displayed, T1 is also the timing of displaying the item when the item is acquired "immediately after the start of fluctuation". T2 is the timing to reach. T3 is the timing of acquisition of the item when the item is acquired "immediately after reach (see FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16)" (stock). Since the acquired item is displayed, T3 is the case when the item is acquired "immediately after reach".
It is also the timing of displaying the item.

T4 is a timing at which symbols (normal symbols, non-pseudo-continuous symbols) other than the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed. When performing a pseudo-ream notice effect using an item, the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped by using the item, so that the normal symbol is stopped before the item is used (Fig. 13-8 (F1), See FIG. 13-9).

T5 to T6 are activation effects (activation image 011SHHD1 and activation image 0) suggesting that the item is activated (used) when a pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed.
A production that displays 11SHHD2. This is the execution period shown in FIGS. 13-9 (G4) and 13-9 (G5). When performing a pseudo-continuous notice effect using an item, the activation effect is executed before the item is used. Note that FIG. 13-9 (G4) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the up card is performed. Figure 13-9 (G
5) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the cancel card is performed.

T7 to T8 are the period of use of the item when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the item is performed. It should be noted that FIGS. 13-9 (H4) and 13-9 (I4) are display examples during the period of use of the up card when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the up card is performed. Further, FIGS. 13-9 (H5) and 13-9 (I5) are display examples during the period of use of the cancel card when the pseudo-continuous notice effect using the cancel card is performed.

T9 is a timing at which a change (movement, destruction, etc.) of a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol starts when a pseudo-continuous notice effect using an item is performed. That is, it is the timing when the items used in T7 to T8 act on the symbols other than the pseudo-continuous symbols displayed temporarily stopped in T4, and the change (movement, destruction, etc.) of the symbols starts. Note that FIG. 13-9 (J4) is a display example when the up card acts on a symbol "6" other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the symbol "6" is moving. In FIG. 13-9 (J5), the cancel card has a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol "
It is a display example when it acts on "6" and the symbol "6" is destroyed.

T10 is a timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-ream notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing at which the first pseudo-ream symbol in the pseudo-ream (1 pseudo-ream, 2 pseudo-ream, 3 pseudo-ream) temporarily stops. Note that FIG. 13-9 (L4) is a display example when the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, moves due to the action of the up card, and the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops. FIG. 13-9 (L5) is a display example when the symbol "6", which is a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, is destroyed by the action of the cancel card, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped.

T11 is a timing at which the revariable display starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing of revariable display after the first temporary stop of the pseudo-ream symbol in the pseudo-ream (1 pseudo-ream, 2 pseudo-ream, 3 pseudo-ream).

T12 is a timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-ream notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing at which the second pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-ream 2 times, pseudo-ream 3 times) temporarily stops. T13 is a timing at which the revariable display starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing of revariable display after the second temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-continuous 2 times, pseudo-ream 3 times).

T14 is a timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops when the pseudo-ream notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing at which the third pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (three pseudo-continuous) temporarily stops. T15 is the timing at which the revariable display starts when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed. That is, it is the timing of revariable display after the third temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-continuous 3 times). T16 is the timing to develop into super reach.

T17 is the timing to start displaying the title of the weak battle (weak title). That is, T17 is the timing to start displaying the weak title when the weak battle is executed, or when the medium battle or the strong battle is executed and the weak title is displayed.

T18 to T19 are effects of displaying activation images (activation image 011SHHD1 and activation image 011SHHD2) suggesting that the item is activated (used) when a battle is completed using the item (weak battle → medium battle). . Figure 13-11 (B3),
It is an execution period of FIG. 13-11 (B4)). Battle using items is completed (
When performing a weak battle → medium battle), perform the activation effect before using the item. In addition, it should be noted
FIG. 13-11 (B3) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the battle is completed using the up card. FIG. 13-11 (B4) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the battle is completed using the cancel card.

T20 to T21 are the period of use of the item when the battle is completed (weak battle → medium battle) using the item. It should be noted that FIGS. 13-11 (C3) and FIG. 1
3-11 (D3) is a battle using up cards (weak battle → medium battle)
This is a display example during the period of use of the up card when In addition, FIG.
-11 (C4) and 13-11 (D4) are display examples during the period of use of the cancel card when the battle is completed (weak battle → medium battle) using the cancel card.

T22 is the timing at which the change of the weak title starts when the battle is completed using the item (weak battle → medium battle). That is, it is the timing when the items used in T20 to T21 act on the weak title displayed in T17 and the change of the weak title starts. Note that FIG. 13-11 (E3) is a display example when the up card acts on a weak title and the weak title changes to a weak medium title. Figure 13-
11 (E4) is a display example when the cancel card acts on the weak title and the weak title is destroyed.

T23 is the timing to start displaying the title of the middle battle (middle title). That is, T23 is the timing to start displaying the middle title when the middle battle is executed or when the strong battle is executed and the middle title is displayed.

T24 to T25 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the item is activated (used) when the battle completion (medium battle → strong battle) using the item is performed. When performing a battle using items (medium battle → strong battle),
Perform an activation effect before using the item.

T26 to T27 are the period of use of the item when the battle is completed using the item (medium battle → strong battle).

T28 is the timing at which the change of the middle title starts when the battle is completed using the item (medium battle → strong battle). That is, it is the timing when the items used in T26 to T27 act on the middle title displayed in T23 and the change of the middle title starts.

T29 is the timing to start displaying the title of the strong battle (strong title). That is, T29 is the timing to start displaying the strong title when the strong battle is executed.

T30 is the timing to start the execution of the battle effect. T31 to T32 are accessories (
This is the operating period of the movable body 011SH32). T41 is the timing to start displaying the result display (defeat) of the battle effect. T42 is the timing at which the execution of the battle effect is finished. T43 is the end timing of the variable display.

13-17 (A) and 13-18 (A) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display (without relief effect) which is a super reach (big hit). FIG. 13-18 (A) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 13-17 (B) and 13-18 (A), a variable display that becomes a super reach (off) and a variable display that becomes a super reach (big hit) (no relief effect). The display is a variable display that is super reach (off), and while the defeat is displayed as the result display of the battle effect and the out-of-order symbol is displayed (T41, T4 in Fig. 13-17 (B)).
2) In the variable display (no relief effect) that becomes super reach (big hit), victory is displayed as the result display of the battle effect, and the big hit symbol is displayed (T41, T4 in Fig. 13-18 (A)).
2) The point is different.

13-17 (A) and 13-18 (B) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the execution timing and the like of various effects in the variable display (with relief effect) which is a super reach (big hit). 13-18 (B) is a continuation of FIG. 13-17 (A).

As shown in FIGS. 13-18 (A) and 13-18 (B), a variable display that is a super reach (big hit) and a variable display that is a super reach (big hit) and a variable display that is a super reach (big hit). The presence / absence of display, effect, etc. in T33 to T40 is different from the variable display that is the display (with relief effect).

In FIG. 13-18 (B), T33 is a timing to start displaying the result display (defeat) of the battle effect when the relief using the item (specifically, the cancel card) is performed.

In T34 to T35, when relief using the item is performed, the execution of the activation effect (effect of displaying the activation image 011SHHD2. See FIG. 13-12 (B2)) suggesting that the item is activated (used). The period. Note that FIG. 13-12 (B2) is a display example during the execution period of the activation effect when the relief using the cancel card is performed.

T36 to T37 are the period of use of the item when the relief using the item is performed. Note that FIGS. 13-12 (C2) and 13-12 (D2) are display examples during the period of use of the cancel card when relief using the cancel card is performed.

T38 displays the result of the battle effect when relief using items is performed (
It is the timing when the change of (defeat) begins. That is, it is the timing when the items used in T36 to T37 act on the display result (defeat) displayed in T33, and the change of the display result (defeat) starts. Note that FIG. 13-12 (E2) is a display example when the cancel card acts on the display result (defeat) and the display result (defeat) is destroyed.

T39 to T40 are execution periods of the relief effect when the relief using the item is performed. Note that FIG. 13-12 (F2) is a display example during the execution period of the relief effect when the relief using the cancel card is performed.

The result display (defeat) at T41 in FIG. 13-17 (B) and FIG. 13-18 (B).
It is preferable that the result display (defeat) in T33 of the above is not easily distinguishable by the player except for items. In other words, when the result display (defeat) of the battle effect is displayed, the player is either the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes the super reach (missing) for the result display (defeat), or the super reach (big hit). ) Is the result display (defeat) in the variable display (with relief effect), if it is determined by the presence or absence of the item, the rabbit can also be determined by something other than the item. It is preferable to make it indistinguishable easily.

For example, the time (T0 to T41) until the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes the super reach (missing) and the result display (defeat) in the variable display that becomes the super reach (big hit) (with relief effect). ) May not be perceived as much as the difference from the time (T0 to T33). As an example, in the case of super reach of a weak battle with a special figure fluctuation time of 130 seconds, fluctuation pattern # 13 (weak battle (outside)) and battle production pattern "BP-J-L1" start fluctuation. After 125 seconds, the result display (defeat) is displayed,
Fluctuation pattern # 18 (weak battle (big hit)) and battle production pattern with relief "BP-
In "J-W3", the result display (defeat) may be displayed 115 seconds after the start of fluctuation. Further, in the case of the super reach of the medium battle in which the special figure fluctuation time is 140 seconds, in the case of the fluctuation pattern # 14 (medium battle (outside)) and the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1", from the start of the fluctuation. After 135 seconds, the result display (defeat) is displayed, and in the battle pattern # 19 (weak battle (big hit)) and the battle production pattern "BP-J-W5" with relief, 1 from the start of fluctuation.
The result display (defeat) may be displayed after 25 seconds. In addition, the special figure fluctuation time is 150
In the case of super reach of strong battle which is seconds, fluctuation pattern # 15 (strong battle (missing))
In addition, in the case of the battle production pattern "BP-K-L1", the result display (defeat) is displayed 145 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the battle production with fluctuation pattern # 20 (weak battle (big hit)) and relief is available. In the pattern "BP-J-W7", the result display (defeat) may be displayed 135 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

13-19 and 13-20 are specific examples of various timings. In FIG. 13-19, “fluctuation pattern # 14” is determined as the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 13-1 (B)), and pseudo-ream (one pseudo-ream) is determined for the pseudo-ream (see FIG. 13-2). ), "BP-TL3 (weak title-> medium title-> medium battle start-> battle (defeat))" is determined as the battle production pattern (see Fig. 13-3 (C) and Fig. 13-6 (B)). ), "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, one card" was decided as an item targeting the start of the battle (see Fig. 13-14 (A)), and an item targeting a pseudo-ream, etc. Various timings are shown when "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, one card" is determined (see FIG. 13-16 (A)). It should be noted that FIG. 13-19 (A) → FIG. 13-19 (B).
Is. Further, in the description of FIG. 13-19, some or all of the contents described in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18 will be omitted.

In FIG. 13-19 (A), T1 is the timing at which one up card targeting the pseudo-ream and one cancel card targeting the completion of the battle are acquired (displayed).

In FIG. 13-19 (A), T5 to T6 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used). T7 to T8 are the period of use of the up card.
T9 is a timing at which the up card acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the change (movement) of the symbol starts.

In FIG. 13-19 (B), T18 to T19 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used). T20 to T21 are the period of use of the cancellation card. T22 is the timing at which the cancel card acts on the weak title and the change (destruction) of the weak title starts.

In FIG. 13-20, “fluctuation pattern # 20” is determined as the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 13-1 (FIG. 13-1).
B)), determine the pseudo-ream (three pseudo-reams) for the pseudo-ren (see Fig. 13-2), and the battle production pattern is "BP-K-W8 (medium title-> strong title-> strong battle start->"Character action available-> battle (defeat)-> relief (win))" is decided (Fig. 13-4 (B), Fig. 13-6 (C)
)), "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, one card" was decided as an item targeting relief (see Fig. 13-13), and as an item targeting the start of battle, " When "Used, Acquired" is determined (see Fig. 13-14 (B)), and "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined as an item targeting the pseudo-ream (see Fig. 13-14 (B)). Various timings (see FIG. 13-16 (B)) are shown.
It should be noted that FIG. 13-20 (A) → FIG. 13-20 (B). Further, in the description of FIG. 13-20, some or all of the contents described in FIGS. 13-17 and 13-18 will be omitted.

In FIG. 13-20 (A), T1 is a timing at which one cancellation card targeting relief is acquired (displayed). T3 is the timing at which one up card targeting the pseudo-ream is acquired (displayed).

In FIG. 13-20 (A), T5 to T6 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used). T7 to T8 are the period of use of the up card.
T9 is a timing at which the up card acts on a symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol and the change (movement) of the symbol starts.

In FIG. 13-20 (B), T24 to T25 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used). T26 to T27 are the period of use of the up card. The up card is not in stock.

In FIG. 13-20 (B), T34 to T35 are execution periods of the activation effect suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used). T36 to T37 are the period of use of the cancellation card. T38 is a timing at which the cancel card acts on the result display (disappearance) and the change (destruction) of the result display (disappearance) starts.

13-21 and 13-22 show S171 in the effect control process process shown in FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process executed in the variable display start setting process of. The flowchart of FIG. 13-22 is a continuation of the flowchart of FIG. 13-21.

In the effect determination process shown in FIG. 13-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is non-reach (variation pattern # 10, # 11) or small hit (variation pattern # 16) (step). 011SHS100). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is non-reach or small hit (step 011SHS100; YES), this flowchart ends. When it is determined that it is not a non-reach or a small hit (step 011SHS100; NO)
, The effect control CPU 120 has a fluctuation pattern of super reach (variation patterns # 13 to #).
15, # 18 to # 20) is determined (step 011SH101).

In step 011SH101, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach (step 011SHS101; NO), that is, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (variation patterns # 12, # 17), the effect control CPU 120 is pseudo-continuous. The presence or absence of the above and the number of pseudo-reams are determined (step 011SHS102). Specifically, FIG. 13-
As shown in 2, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pseudo-ream at a rate of 80% and the pseudo-relation (one pseudo-ream) at a rate of 20%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) (step 011SHS103).

Following step 011SHS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-ream (step 011SHS104). That is, it is determined in step 011SHS102 whether or not it is determined to be pseudo-continuous. When it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream (step 011SHS104; NO), that is, when it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream, this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step 011SH104 that there is a pseudo-ream (step 01)
1SHS104; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an item targeting the pseudo-ream based on the fluctuation pattern (step 011SHS105). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (displacement) (variation pattern # 12), the effect control CPU 120 sets "not used" to 5% as shown in FIG. 13-15 (A).
"Used, not acquired" is determined at a ratio of 12%, "Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a ratio of 26%, and "used""Yes, with acquisition, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 47%, and "with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 2%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is decided at a rate of 8%. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (
In the case of (big hit) (variation pattern # 17), the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 13-.
As shown in 15 (B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, not acquired" is 15
Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Determined at a rate of 45%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 2%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Is determined at a rate of 8%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of an item targeting the pseudo-ream, etc.) (step 011SHS106). Then, this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step 011SH101 that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (step 011SHS101; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of pseudo-reams based on the fluctuation pattern (FIG. 13-22). Step 011S
HS110). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-2, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach (weak battle) (fluctuation patterns # 13, # 18), the effect control CPU 120 has a pseudo-continuousness of 30%. Determined by the ratio of, and the pseudo-continuous possession (one pseudo-ream) was determined at the ratio of 40%.
Pseudo-repeated (two pseudo-reams) is determined at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect control CPU 120
When the fluctuation pattern is super reach (medium battle) (variation patterns # 14, # 19), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pseudo-reach (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 30%. Pseudo-repeated (2 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 30%, and pseudo-repeated (3 pseudo-ream) is 20%.
Determined by the ratio of. Further, the effect control CPU 120 has a fluctuation pattern of super reach (
In the case of strong battle) (variation patterns # 15, # 20), the pseudo-ream is determined at a rate of 10%, the pseudo-relation (1 pseudo-ream) is determined at a rate of 20%, and the pseudo-ream is determined. Yes (twice pseudo-ream) 3
It is determined at a rate of 0%, and pseudo-continuous possession (pseudo-continuous 3 times) is determined at a rate of 40%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) (step 01).
1SHS111).

Following step 011SHS111, the effect control CPU 120 determines a battle effect pattern (see FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4) based on the variation pattern (step 01).
1SHS112). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach (weak battle) (fluctuation pattern # 13), the effect control CPU 120 has the battle effect pattern “BP” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A). -J-L1 "is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle production pattern" BP-J-L2 "is determined at a rate of 80%. In addition, the effect control CPU 120
When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (weak battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 18), 40 battle production patterns "BP-J-W1" are set as shown in FIG. 13-6 (A).
The battle production pattern "BP-J-W2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the battle production pattern "BP-J-W3" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the battle production pattern "B" is determined.
"PJ-W4" is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach (medium battle) (fluctuation pattern # 14), FIG.
As shown in 3-6 (B), the battle production pattern "BP-T-L1" is determined at a rate of 10%, the battle production pattern "BP-T-L2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle is performed. The production pattern "BP-T-L3" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-L4" is determined.
Is determined at a rate of 40%. Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (medium battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 19), FIG. 13-6 (B)
As shown in, the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W1" is determined at a rate of 20%, the battle effect pattern "BP-T-W2" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-" is determined.
"T-W3" is determined at a rate of 15%, battle production pattern "BP-T-W4" is determined at a rate of 15%, and battle production pattern "BP-T-W5" is determined at a rate of 10%. , The battle production pattern "BP-T-W6" is decided at a rate of 10%, and the battle production pattern "BP-"
"T-W7" is determined at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP-T-W8" is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is out of the super reach (strong battle) (fluctuation pattern # 15), the effect control CPU 120 has the battle effect pattern “BP-K-” as shown in FIG. 13-6 (C). "L1" is decided at a rate of 5%, and the battle production pattern "BP"
-K-L2 "is decided at a rate of 10%, and the battle production pattern" BP-K-L3 "is 15%.
The battle production pattern "BP-K-L4" is determined at a ratio of 15%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-L5" is determined at a ratio of 25%, and the battle production pattern "BP" is determined.
-K-L6 "is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, in the effect control CPU 120, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (strong battle) jackpot (fluctuation pattern # 20), FIG. 13
As shown in -6 (C), the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W1" is determined at a rate of 15%, and the battle effect pattern "BP-K-W2" is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern "BP-K-W3" is decided at a rate of 15%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W4"
Is determined at a rate of 9%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W5" is determined at a rate of 8%.
The battle production pattern "BP-K-W6" is decided at a rate of 8%, and the battle production pattern "B"
"P-K-W7" is determined at a rate of 6%, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8" is determined at a rate of 6%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K-W9" is determined at a rate of 6%. After deciding, the battle production pattern "BP-K-W10" is decided at a rate of 4%, and the battle production pattern "BP-K"
-W11 "is determined at a rate of 4%, and the battle production pattern" BP-K-W12 "is determined at a rate of 4%.

Following step 011SHS112, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (battle effect pattern) (step 011SHS113).

Following step 011SHS113, the effect control CPU 120 is set to step 011S.
It is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern determined in HS112 is a battle effect pattern including relief (battle effect pattern including "relief (win)" in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4) (step 011SHS114). .. In other words, in step 011SHS112, it is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern for executing the relief effect is determined. Note that FIG. 13
-3 and the battle effect patterns shown in FIG. 13-4, two of the battle effect patterns "BP-J-W3" and "BP-J-W4" shown in FIG. 13-3 (B), FIG. 13-3. Four battle production patterns "BP-T-W5" to "BP-T-W8" in (D), and battle production patterns "BP-K-W7" to "BP-K-" in FIG. 13-4 (B). Six of "W12" are battle production patterns including relief.

When it is determined in step 011SHS114 that the battle effect pattern includes relief (step 011SHS114; YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an item targeting relief (step 011SHS115). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-13, the effect control CPU 120 determines "not used" at a rate of 1%, "used / not acquired" at a rate of 9%, and " Used, acquired, up card,
"Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, "Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%, "used, acquired, canceled card" , Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card is determined at a rate of 75%, and "Used, Acquired, Canceled card, Immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 15%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence / absence of an item targeting relief, etc.) (step 011SHS116).

On the other hand, in step 011SHS114, when it is determined that the battle effect pattern does not include relief (step 011SHS114; NO), step 011SHS115,
The process proceeds to step 011SHS117 without executing the process of step 011SHS116.

Following step 011SHS114 (NO) or step 011SHS116, in the effect control CPU 120, the battle effect pattern determined in step 011SHS112 is a battle effect pattern including the battle completion (“weak title →” in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4 It is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern includes at least one of "medium title" and "medium title-> strong title" (step 011SHS117). In other words, in step 011SHS112, it is determined whether or not the battle effect pattern for executing the battle rise is determined. Of the battle effect patterns shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the battle effect patterns "BP-T-L1" and "BP-T-L3" shown in FIG. 13-3 (C).
The two battle production patterns "BP-T-W1" and "BP-T-W3" shown in Fig. 13-3 (D).
, "BP-T-W5", "BP-T-W7", the battle production patterns "BP-K-L1", "BP-K-L2", "BP" in Fig. 13-4 (A). -K-L4 "," BP-K-L
4 of "5", battle production patterns "BP-K-W1" and "BP-K-" in Fig. 13-4 (B)
W2 ”,“ BP-K-W4 ”,“ BP-K-W5 ”,“ BP-K-W7 ”,“ BP-K-
Eight of "W8", "BP-K-W10", and "BP-K-W11" are battle production patterns including the start of battle. Further, among the battle effect patterns shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the battle effect pattern with one battle completion number is the battle effect pattern “BP-TL1” shown in FIG. 13-3 (C). Two of "BP-T-L3", battle production patterns "BP-T-W1", "BP-T-W3", "BP-T-W5", "BP-T-W5" in FIG. 13-3 (D)
Four of "BP-T-W7", battle production pattern "BP-K-L2" in Fig. 13-4 (A),
Two of "BP-K-L5", the battle production pattern "BP-K-W2" shown in Fig. 13-4 (B)
, "BP-K-W5", "BP-K-W8", and "BP-K-W11". In addition, there are two battle production patterns, "BP-K-L1" and "BP-K-L4" in Fig. 13-4 (A), and Fig. 13-4 (B). Battle production patterns "BP-K-W1", "BP-K-W4", "BP-K-W7", "BP-K-"
There are four of "W10".

In step 011SHS117, when it is determined that the battle effect pattern includes the battle completion (step 011SHS117; YES), the effect control CPU 120
Determines the presence or absence of an item targeting the battle rise based on the battle effect pattern (number of battle rises) and the item targeting relief (presence or absence of the cancel card) (step 011SHS118). Specifically, CP for production control
As shown in FIG. 13-14 (A), the U120 determines "not used" at a rate of 5% when the number of battles is one and the item for which relief is targeted is not acquired. , "Used, not acquired" is determined at a rate of 40%, "Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, "used, acquired,""Up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 5%, "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 30%, "used, acquired" ， Cancel card ， Immediately after reach ，
"1 sheet" is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has one battle rise and has acquired an item targeting relief, FIG. 13-1
As shown in 4 (B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, not acquired" is 20%.
"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined by the ratio of 10%, and "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is 5 Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 40%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" Determined at a rate of 20%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has two battles and no item for which relief is targeted has been acquired, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (C), "not used" is 5%. "Used, not acquired" is determined at a ratio of 20%, "Used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and "used""Yes, with acquisition, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 5%, and "with use, with acquisition, cancellation card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was decided at a rate of 25%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards" was determined at a rate of 5%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" is decided at a rate of 5%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has two battles and the item for which the relief is targeted has been acquired, as shown in FIG. 13-14 (D), "not used" is 5%. Determined by the ratio, "Used, Yes,
"No acquisition" is determined at a rate of 20%, and "Used, Acquired, Upcard, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1"
"Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 10%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation," 1 piece "5
Determined at a rate of%, 25 "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards"
Determined at a rate of%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" determined at a rate of 5%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 2 cards" 25 Determined at a rate of%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the determination content (presence or absence of an item targeting the completion of the battle, etc.) (step 011SHS119).

On the other hand, in step 011SHS117, when it is determined that the battle production pattern does not include the battle completion (step 011SHS117; NO), step 011S
Step 011SHS1 without executing the processes of HS118 and step 011SHS119.
Proceed to 24.

Following step 011SHS117 (NO) or step 011SHS119, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a pseudo-ream (step 011SHS124).
That is, it is determined in step 011SHS110 whether or not it is determined to be pseudo-continuous. When it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream (step 011SHS124; NO), that is, when it is determined that there is no pseudo-ream, this flowchart ends.

When it is determined in step 011SH124 that there is a pseudo-ream (step 01)
1SHS124; YES), the effect control CPU 120 targets the fluctuation pattern, the number of canceled cards acquired (the number of canceled cards acquired in determining the presence or absence of items targeting the relief of step 011SHS115, and the battle completion of step 011SHS118. Based on the total number of canceled cards acquired in determining the presence / absence of the item, etc., the presence / absence of the item targeting the pseudo-ren is determined (step 011SHS125). Specifically, in the case of super reach (disappearance) (variation patterns # 13, # 14, # 15), the effect control CPU 120 acquires the number of cancellation cards as shown in FIG. 13-16 (A). Regardless, "not used" was decided at a rate of 6%, and "
"Used, acquired, not acquired" was determined at a rate of 11%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 26%, and "used, acquired, upcard" was determined. ， Immediately after reach ，
"1 card" was decided at a rate of 47%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation,
"1 card" is determined at a rate of 2%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 8%. In the case of Super Reach (missing), since there is no relief, the number of cancellation cards obtained will not be 3, so the number of cancellation cards obtained will be 0 to 2 like Super Reach (big hit). There is no distinction between the case of cards and the case of three cancellation cards. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of super reach (big hit) (variation patterns # 18, # 19, # 20) and the number of canceled cards acquired is 0 to 2, FIG. 13-16 (Fig. 13-16). As shown in B), "not used" is determined at a rate of 6%, "used / not acquired" is determined at a rate of 14%, and "used / acquired / upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation,""1card" is determined at a rate of 25%, "used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 45%, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation" , 1 card "was decided at a rate of 2%, and" used, acquired, canceled card,
Immediately after reach, "1 sheet" is determined at a rate of 8%. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of super reach (big hit) (variation patterns # 18, # 19, # 20) and the number of cancellation cards acquired is 3, FIG. 13-16 (C). As shown in, "not used" is 6
Determined at a rate of%, "used, not acquired" was determined at a rate of 14%, "used, acquired, upcard, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 25%, and ""Used, acquired, up card, immediately after reach, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 55%, and "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" was determined at a rate of 0%. "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after reach, 1 card" is determined at a rate of 0%. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120
Set the decision contents (presence or absence of items targeting pseudo-ream, etc.) (step 011S)
HS126). Then, this flowchart ends.

13-23 to 13-26 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 011SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 are shown in FIGS. 13-19 (A) and 13-19 (B).
), The main scenes are shown as an example. That is, the fluctuation pattern is "fluctuation pattern # 14 (out of super reach (middle battle))", and in the effect determination process (FIGS. 13-21, 13-22), the pseudo-ream is pseudo-consecutive (pseudo-ream once). ), And "BP-TL3 (weak title-> medium title-> medium battle start-> battle (defeat)") is determined for the battle production pattern, and "used, acquired" for items targeting the battle. Main when "Yes, Cancel Card, Immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" is determined, and "Yes, Acquired, Up Card, Immediately after the start of change, 1 card" is determined for items targeting pseudo-ren. The scene is shown as an example.

In addition, in FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26, FIG. 13-23 (A) → FIG. 13-23 (B).
) → Fig. 13-23 (C) → Fig. 13-23 (D) → Fig. 13-23 (E) →, ..., Fig. 13-2
3 (H) → FIG. 13-24 (A) → FIG. 13-24 (B) → FIG. 13-24 (C) → FIG. 13-2
4 (D)-> FIG. 13-24 (E)->, ..., FIG. 13-24 (H)-> FIG. 13-25 (A)-> FIG.
3-25 (B) → Fig. 13-25 (C) → Fig. 13-25 (D) → Fig. 13-25 (E) →, ...
, FIG. 13-25 (H) → FIG. 13-26 (A) → FIG. 13-26 (B) → FIG. 13-26 (C)
→ The transition is made in the order of FIG. 13-26 (D) → FIG. 13-26 (E). In addition, FIG. 13-23 (A)
(The same applies to the other figures. In the other figures, the reference numerals are omitted), the active display area 011 SHAHA, which is a display area for the active display, and the active display 011 SHAH displayed in the active display area 011 SHAHA are displayed.

FIG. 13-23 (A) is a scene (the scene of T0 in FIG. 13-19 (A)) in which the variable display is started. FIG. 13-23 (B) shows a scene (FIG. 13-) in which one up card image 011SHUPC (one up card) and one cancellation card image 011SHCCXLC (one cancellation card) are displayed (stocked). 19 (A) T1 scene). FIG. 13-23 (C) is a scene of reaching (the scene of T2 in FIG. 13-19 (A)).

In FIGS. 13-23 (D) to 13-23 (F), the pseudo-ream effect was performed, and the non-pseudo-ream symbol (normal symbol) "6" different from the pseudo-ream symbol "re" was stopped and displayed. Scene (Fig. 13-19 (Fig. 13-19)
A) Immediately before T4 to T4).

13-23 (G) to 13-23 (H) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is being performed (T5 to T6 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). (Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-23 (G) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated is displayed. FIG. 13-23 (H) is a scene (the scene of T6 in FIG. 13-19 (A)) in which the activated image 011SHHD1 is displayed. In FIG. 13-23 (G), for example, the activated image 011SHHD1 is vaguely displayed (for example, it is displayed with a blurred focus, displayed semi-transparently, displayed in monochrome color, etc.). Figure 13-27
The same applies to (H) and the like. The same applies to the scene (FIG. 13-25 (B), etc.) in which the activation image 011SHHD2, which suggests that the cancellation card is activated, is displayed.

13-24 (A) to 13-24 (C) are scenes in which the up card is used (scenes T7 to T8 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). Specifically, FIG. 13-24 (A) is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked upcard image 011SHUPC is changed from the normal mode to a notice mode for notifying that the stock is released. FIG. 13-24 (B) shows a scene in which the upcard image 011SHUPC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen as a notification that the upcard is used. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-24 (A) to FIG. 13-24 (B), for example, the upcard image 011SHUPC at the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (A) is temporarily erased, and at the same time (or after erasing). ), The up-card image 011SHUPC may be displayed at the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (B), or from the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (A) to FIG. 13-24 (B).
) May be moved while enlarging the upcard image 011SHUPC. Figure 13-
24 (C) is a scene in which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts on the symbol “6” which is the temporary stop symbol. Regarding the change from FIG. 13-24 (B) to FIG. 13-24 (C),
For example, once the upcard image 011SHUPC at the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (B) is erased,
At the same time as erasing (or after erasing), the upcard image 011S is at the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (C).
The HUPC may be displayed, or the upcard image 011SHUPC may be moved from the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (B) to the position shown in FIG. 13-24 (C) while being reduced.

13-24 (D) to 13-24 (F) show a scene (FIG. 13-24) until the up card is used, the middle symbol is updated (UP) by one symbol, and the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is temporarily stopped. 13-19 (A), scenes T9 to T10). Specifically, FIG. 13-24 (D) shows the upcard image 0.
This is a scene in which the symbol "6" on which 11SHUPC has acted has begun to move. FIG. 13-24 (E) shows
This is the scene just before the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" stops. FIG. 13-24 (F) is a scene in which the pseudo-continuous symbol “re” has stopped.

FIG. 13-24 (G) is a scene in which the revariable display is started (the scene of T11 in FIG. 13-19 (A)). FIG. 13-24 (H) shows a scene developed into super reach (Fig. 13-19 (Fig. 13-19).
A) T16 scene).

FIG. 13-25 (A) shows a scene in which the weak title image 011SHJT is displayed (FIG. 13-1).
9 (B) T17 scene).

13-25 (B) to 13-25 (C) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is being performed (T18 to T19 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-25 (B) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD2, which suggests that the cancellation card is activated, is displayed. Figure 13-25 (C
) Is a scene in which the activated image 011SHHD2 is displayed (a scene of T19 in FIG. 13-19 (B)).

13-25 (D) to 13-25 (F) are scenes in which the cancel card is used (scenes T20 to T21 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). Specifically, FIG. 13-25 (D)
) Is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked cancel card image 011SHCXLC has changed from the normal mode to a notice mode for notifying that the stock is released. Figure 13-25
(E) is a cancellation card image 011S as a notification that the cancellation card is used.
This is a scene in which HCXLC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. It should be noted that FIGS. 13-25 (D) to 1
Regarding the change to 3-25 (E), for example, the cancel card image 011SHXLC at the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (D) is erased once, and at the same time (or after erasing), FIG. 13-25
The cancel card image 011SHPXLC may be displayed at the position (E), and FIG. 13-
Cancel card image 011SHPX from position 25 (D) to position FIG. 13-25 (E)
The LC may be moved while expanding. FIG. 13-25 (F) shows the cancellation card image 01.
This is a scene in which 1SHCXLC acts on the weak title image 011SHJT. In addition, FIG. 13-
Regarding the change from 25 (E) to FIG. 13-25 (F), for example, the cancel card image 011SHXLC at the position shown in FIG. 13-25 (E) is erased once, and at the same time (or after the erase), FIG. 13- The cancel card image 011SHXLC may be displayed at the position 25 (F), or the cancel card image 011SHXLC may be moved from the position of FIG. 13-25 (E) to the position of FIG. 13-25 (F) while being reduced. May be good.

13-25 (G) to 13-25 (H) show a scene in which a cancel card is used, the weak title image 011SHJT is canceled, and the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed (FIG. 13-19 (B)). (Scene of T22 to T23). Specifically, FIG. 13-25 (
G) is a weak title image 011SH on which the cancel card image 011SHXLC acted.
This is the scene where JT is being destroyed. FIG. 13-25 (H) is a scene in which the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed in place of the destroyed weak title image 011SHJT.

FIG. 13-26 (A) shows the middle battle start image 011SHTBS notifying the start of the middle battle.
Is displayed (the scene of T30 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). FIG. 13-26 (B) is a scene of offense and defense between a friendly character and character B. FIG. 13-26 (C) is a scene in which a friendly character is defeated. FIG. 13-26 (D) shows the LOSE image 011SHKH notifying the defeat.
1 is displayed (the scene of T41 in FIG. 13-19 (B)). FIG. 13-26 (E)
Is a scene in which the out-of-order symbol is displayed (the scene of T42 in FIG. 13-19 (B)).

13-27 to 13-32 are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation related to the feature unit 011SH.
Specifically, FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32 show FIGS. 13-20 (A) and 13-20 (B).
), The main scenes are shown as an example. That is, the fluctuation pattern is "fluctuation pattern # 20 (super reach (strong battle) jackpot)", and in the production determination process (Fig. 13-21, Fig. 13-22), the pseudo-ream is pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3 times). ), And the battle production pattern "BP-K-W8 (medium title-> strong title-> strong battle start-> character movements-> battle (defeat)-> relief (win))" is decided, and relief is targeted. "Used, acquired, canceled card, 1 card immediately after the start of fluctuation" is decided for the items that have been used, and "used, not acquired" is decided for the items that target the battle, and the pseudo-ren is targeted. Items, etc. "Used, acquired, upcard,
This is an example of the main scenes when "one sheet immediately after reach" is decided.

In addition, in FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32, FIGS. 13-27 (A) →, ..., FIG. 13-2.
7 (H) → Fig. 13-28 (A) →, ..., Fig. 13-28 (H) → Fig. 13-29 (A) →, ...
, FIG. 13-29 (H) → FIG. 13-30 (A) →, ..., FIG. 13-30 (H) → FIG. 13-31
(A) →, ..., FIG. 13-31 (H) → FIG. 13-32 (A) →, ..., FIG. 13-32 (F).

In the scenes of FIGS. 13-27 to 13-32, some or all of the scenes common to the scenes of FIGS. 13-23 to 13-26 will be omitted.

FIG. 13-27 (A) is a scene (the scene of T0 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which the variable display is started. FIG. 13-27 (B) shows one cancellation card image 011SHCCXLC (1).
This is a scene (the scene of T1 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which (the number of cancellation cards) is displayed (stocked). FIG. 13-27 (C) is a scene of reaching (the scene of T2 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). FIG. 13-27 (D) is a scene (the scene of T3 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which one up-card image 011SHUPC (one up-card) is displayed (stocked).

In FIGS. 13-27 (E) to 13-27 (G), the pseudo-ream effect was performed, and the non-pseudo-ream symbol (normal symbol) "6" different from the pseudo-ream symbol "re" was stopped and displayed. Scene (Fig. 13-20 (Fig. 13-20)
A) Immediately before T4 to T4).

13-27 (H) to 13-28 (A) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is being performed (T5 to T6 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). (Scene).

13-28 (B) to 13-28 (D) are scenes in which the up card is used (scenes T7 to T8 in FIG. 13-20 (A)).

13-28 (E) to 13-28 (G) show scenes (Fig. 13) until the up card is used, the middle symbol is updated (UP) by one symbol, and the pseudo-continuous symbol "re" is temporarily stopped. 13-20 (A), scenes T9 to T10).

FIG. 13-28 (H) is a scene (the scene of T11 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which the revariable display is started.

In FIGS. 13-29 (A) to 13-29 (B), a scene in which a pseudo-ream effect is performed and the pseudo-ream symbol "re" is stopped and displayed (T11 to T12 in FIGS. 13-20 (A)). (Scene). Figure 1
In 3-29 (C), the revariable display is started (the scene of T13 in FIG. 13-20 (A)).
Is. 13-29 (D) to 13-29 (E) show a scene in which the pseudo-ream pattern "re" is stopped and displayed (T13 to T14 in FIG. 13-20 (A)). (Scene). FIG. 13-29 (F) is a scene (the scene of T15 in FIG. 13-20 (A)) in which the revariable display is started. FIG. 13-29 (G) shows a scene developed into super reach (Fig. 13-20 (Fig. 13-20).
A) T16 scene).

FIG. 13-29 (H) shows a scene in which the middle title image 011SHTT is displayed (FIG. 13-2).
The scene of T23 of 0 (B)).

13-30 (A) to 13-30 (B) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the up card is activated (used) is being performed (T24 to T25 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Scene)
Is. Specifically, FIG. 13-30 (A) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the up card is activated is displayed. FIG. 13-30 (B) is a scene in which the activated image 011SHHD1 is displayed (a scene of T25 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-30 (C) to 13-30 (E) are scenes in which an upcard (non-stock) is used (scenes T26 to T27 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Specifically, FIG. 13
-30 (C) is a scene in which the emergency activation message 011SHEMA foretelling that the unstocked up card will be used (activated) specially (emergency) is displayed. Figure 13-
30 (D) is an up card image 011SHU as a notification that the up card is used.
This is a scene in which the PC is displayed large in the center of the screen. FIG. 13-30 (E) is a scene in which the up-card image 011SHUPC acts on the medium title image 011SHTT.

13-30 (F) to 13-30 (G) show a scene in which the up card is used, the medium title image 011SHTT is updated by one step (UP), and the strong title image 011SHKT is displayed (FIG. 13). -20 (B) from T28 to T29). Specifically, FIG. 13
-30 (F) is a scene in which the medium-strength title image 011SHTKT (an image between the medium-strength title image 011SHTT and the strong title image 011SHKT) is displayed. Regarding the change from the medium title image 011SHTT to the medium strong title image 011SHTKT, for example, the medium title image 011SHTT may be erased once, and at the same time (or after the deletion), the medium strong title image 011SHTKT may be displayed. The appearance (process) of the number of stars increasing from two to three may be displayed in an easy-to-recognize manner by, for example, blinking the third star for a certain period of time. FIG. 13-30 (G) is a scene in which the strong title image 011SHTKT is displayed. Regarding the change from the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT to the strong title image 011SHTKT, for example, the medium-strong title image 011SHTKT may be deleted once, and at the same time (or after the deletion), the strong title image 011SHKT may be displayed. The appearance (process) of the change of the enemy character name may be displayed in an easy-to-recognize manner by, for example, blinking the changed enemy character name for a certain period of time.

FIG. 13-30 (H) shows the strong battle start image 011SHKBS that notifies the start of the strong battle.
Is displayed (the scene of T30 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). FIG. 13-31 (A) is a scene of offense and defense between a ally character and character C. FIG. 13-31 (B) shows the movable body 011S.
It is a scene (the scene of T31 to T32 of FIG. 13-20 (B)) in which H32 is operating. Figure 1
3-31 (C) is a scene in which a friendly character is defeated. FIG. 13-31 (D) is a scene in which the LOSE image 011SHKH1 notifying the defeat is displayed (the scene of T33 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-31 (E) to 13-31 (F) show scenes in which an activation effect suggesting that the cancel card is activated (used) is being performed (T34 to T35 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Scene). Specifically, FIG. 13-31 (E) is a scene in which the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancellation card is activated is displayed. FIG. 13-31 (F
) Is a scene in which the activated image 011SHHD2 is displayed (a scene of T35 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

13-31 (G) to 13-32 (A) are scenes in which the cancel card is used (scenes T36 to T37 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). Specifically, FIG. 13-31 (G)
) Is a scene in which the display mode of the stocked cancel card image 011SHCXLC has changed from the normal mode to a notice mode for notifying that the stock is released. Figure 13-31
(H) is a cancellation card image 011S as a notification that the cancellation card is used.
This is a scene in which HCXLC is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen. FIG. 13-32 (A) is a scene in which the cancel card image 011SHXLC acted on the LOSE image 011SHKH1.

FIG. 13-32 (B) shows the LOSE on which the cancel card image 011SHPXLC acted.
This is a scene in which image 011SHKH is destroyed (scenes T38 to T39 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). FIG. 13-32 (C) is a scene in which a friendly character counterattacks character C. FIG. 13
-32 (D) is the scene where the ally character wins. FIG. 13-32 (E) is a scene in which the WIN image 011SHKH2 notifying the victory is displayed (the scene of T41 in FIG. 13-20 (B)). FIG. 13-32 (F) is a scene in which the jackpot symbol is displayed (the scene of T42 in FIG. 13-20 (B)).

In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (E) is an item used without stock (up card used in "with, without acquisition" in FIG. 13-14). When,
Since the item in stock (cancellation card) is a different type of item, naturally there is no change in the item in stock (cancellation card). Although the illustrations are omitted,
Even if the item used without stock and the item in stock are of the same type (up card), the item in stock (up card) does not change. In other words, the up card in stock is not consumed and the up card is used. Emergency activation message 011SHE in FIGS. 13-30 (C) to 13-30 (E)
MA notifies the use of items used without stock, but when the items used without stock and the items in stock are of the same type (up card), the items in stock It also notifies the non-consumption of (up card).

Further, although illustrations and the like are omitted, when displaying (stocking) items of the same type, for example, the items may be displayed so that the quantity can be understood. As an example, "x2" may be displayed in the case of two sheets, and "x3" may be displayed in the case of three sheets.

(About the modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 011SH)
Subsequently, a modified example of the game machine related to the feature unit 011SH will be described.

(Modification example 1 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, in the "determination ratio of the presence / absence of items targeting the pseudo-ream", the determination ratio of "not used" is the same (5%) in both the normal reach (missing) and the normal reach (big hit). (Fig. 13-15), but normal reach (big hit)
In the case of, the determination rate of "not used" may be higher than in the case of normal reach (off). Similarly, in the above, in the case of super reach (off), super reach (big hit)
In the case of (Fig. 13-16), the determination rate of "not used" is the same (6%).
), In the case of super reach (big hit), the determination rate of "not used" may be higher than in the case of super reach (missing).

(Modification example 2 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, in the "determination rate of presence / absence of items targeting pseudo-ren", the determination rate of "used / not acquired" is higher in the case of normal reach (big hit) than in the case of normal reach (missing). (Fig. 13-15), the determination ratio of "not used" may be the same in both the normal reach (off) and the normal reach (big hit). Similarly, in the above, the case of super reach (big hit) is super reach (missing).
An example is explained in which the decision rate of "used, not acquired" is higher than in the case of (Fig. 13-16).
, In both the case of super reach (missing) and the case of super reach (big hit), the determination ratio of "used / not acquired" may be the same.

(Modification example 3 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting the activation of the upcard is displayed before the activation (use) of the upcard, and the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting the activation of the cancellation card is displayed before the activation of the cancel card (that is, , An example of executing different activation effects depending on the item to be activated) has been described, but a common activation effect may be executed regardless of the item to be activated. That is, the type of the item to be activated may not be specified depending on the effect mode of the activation effect.

(Modification example 4 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example has been described in which the activation image 011SHHD1 is always displayed when the activation image 011SHHD1 suggesting that the upcard is activated is displayed.
13-23 (G) → 13-23 (H), 13-27 (H) → 13-28 (A),
FIG. 13-30 (A) → FIG. 13-30 (B), there may be a case where the activation image 011SHHD1 is not displayed after the activation image 011SHHD1 is displayed (fanning of the ghost). That is, even when the activated image 011SHHD1 is not displayed (in the case of Gase), it may be possible to encourage whether the activated image 011SHHD1 is displayed. Similarly, in the above, an example has been described in which the activation image 011SHHD2 is always displayed when the activation image 011SHHD2 suggesting that the cancellation card is activated is displayed (FIG. 13-25 (FIG. 13-25).
B) → FIG. 13-25 (C), FIG. 13-31 (E) → FIG. 13-31 (F)), activation image 01
There may be a case where the activation image 011SHHD2 is not displayed after fanning whether 1SHHD2 is displayed (fanning of the ghost). That is, even when the activated image 011SHHD2 is not displayed (in the case of Gase), it may be possible to encourage whether the activated image 011SHHD2 is displayed.

(Variation example 5 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, an example of executing the activation effect even when using an item that has not been acquired (stocked) has been described (T24 to T27 in FIGS. 13-20 (B), 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (A) to FIG.
(See FIG. 13-30 (E)), when using an item that has not been acquired (stocked), the activation effect may not be executed.

(Variation Example 6 of Feature 011SH)
In the above, regardless of whether the target is pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 1 time) to pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3 times), both an up card and a cancel card can be acquired as items used as targets. Although an example has been described, the items that can be acquired may differ depending on the number of pseudo-reams. For example, when targeting pseudo-ream (1 pseudo-ream), only upcards can be acquired, and pseudo-repeated (2 pseudo-ream) or pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3).
When targeting (times), both the up card and the cancel card may be acquired (that is, when the cancel card is used by targeting the pseudo-ream, the pseudo-ream is confirmed twice or more. May be).

(Modification example 7 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, when the up card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the up-card may or may not be acquired, while when the cancel card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the cancel card may be acquired. Explained an example that is always acquired (stocked) (that is, an item that targets a pseudo-ream and is used without stock is always an up card) (see FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16). The cancel card may be used in place of or in addition to the card, targeting the pseudo-ream without stock. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on whether the up card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target and without stock, or the cancel card is used with the pseudo-ream as the target without stock.

(Modification Example 8 of Feature 011SH)
In the above, when the item is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 1) or the pseudo-repeated (pseudo-ream 3 times) is used. As in the case of (times), an example of using an item in the first pseudo-ream (when the first pseudo-ream “re” is stopped) has been described (see, for example, FIG. 13-17 (A)). , The timing to use the item does not have to be the first pseudo-ream. For example, in the case of pseudo-ream (twice pseudo-ream),
You may use the item for the second pseudo-ream without using the item for the first pseudo-ream. Also, in the case of pseudo-ream (three pseudo-ream), pseudo-ream 2 without using items in the first pseudo-ream
You may use the item for the third time (or the third pseudo-ream). In addition, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on when the item is used.

(Modification example 9 of the feature portion 011SH)
In the above, when the item is used with the pseudo-ream as the target, the item is used once regardless of whether the item is pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 1 time) to pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 3 times). As described above (see FIG. 13-17 (A)), in the case of pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream 2 times), the item may be used twice (pseudo-ream 1st time, pseudo-ream 2nd time 2 times). .. In addition, pseudo-ream (three pseudo-ream)
In the case of, the item may be used 3 times (3 times from the 1st pseudo-ream to the 3rd pseudo-ream).
It may be used twice (two times out of the first pseudo-ream to the third pseudo-ream). Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on how many times the item has been used.
You may.

(Modification example 10 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, when the up card is used to target the battle start, the up card may or may not be acquired, while when the cancel card is used to target the battle start, the cancel card may be acquired. Explained an example that is always acquired (stocked) (that is, an item that is used without stock for the battle start is always an up card) (see Fig. 13-14), but instead of an up card or In addition, the cancel card may be used without stock to target the battle. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on whether the up card is used with no stock as the target for the battle or the cancellation card is used without the stock as the target for the battle.

(Modification example 11 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, regardless of whether one up card is used to target the battle, or one cancel card is used to target the battle, the degree of success is the same (both "weak title → medium title" or We have explained an example of "medium title-> strong title" (see Fig. 13-17 (B)), but if the degree of growth differs depending on whether the up card is used or the cancel card is used. You may let me.
For example, as a battle production pattern for a strong battle, in addition to a battle production pattern including one stage of "weak title → medium title" and "medium title → strong title", two stages of "weak title → weak title →"
Prepare a battle production pattern including "strong title". For example, when an up card is used while a weak title is displayed, it always changes from a weak title to a medium title, while a weak title is displayed. If a cancel card is used in, the weak title may change to a medium title or the weak title may change to a strong title (note that the cancel card is displayed when the weak title is displayed). Whenever it is used, it may go from a weak title to a strong title).

(Modification example 12 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example of executing the battle start before the start of the battle (an example of updating the title of the battle) has been described (see, for example, FIG. 13-17 (A)), but instead of or in addition to the battle before the start of the battle, the battle You may execute the rise after the start of the battle. For example, a medium battle may be established in the middle of a weak battle. For example, in the middle of a weak battle with character A, the opponent may change to character B in a medium battle.

(Modification example 13 of feature unit 011SH)
In the above, the number of cancellation cards acquired (stock number) is limited, but the limit may not be set. In other words, if you want to get a cancel card (1 card) targeting relief and a cancel card (2 cards) targeting the battle completion, you can target the 4th pseudo-ream and get a cancel card (1 card). Although the acquisition of (sheets) is restricted (see FIG. 13-16 (C)), the restriction may not be provided. Even if there is no limit on the number of cancellation cards that can be obtained, the frequency with which the number of cancellation cards can be obtained is four, depending on the execution rate of the relief effect and the determination rate of the presence or absence of items targeting pseudo-ren. Is not many.

(Modification example 14 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the action (movement) caused by the use of the item is not an example (the action dedicated to the use of the item) that is unique to the use of the item. However, the points that the pseudo-ream notice production, the battle start-up and the relief production are performed even when the item is not used (Fig. 13-8, Fig. 13-10,
Although (see FIG. 13-12)) has been described, the use of the item may have a dedicated effect. As an example, the relief effect may be a dedicated action by using the item. Specifically, the determination ratio of "not used" may be set to 0% in the determination ratio (FIG. 13-13) of the presence or absence of items targeting relief. Alternatively, item acquisition (stock) →
It may have a dedicated effect due to use. As an example, the relief effect may be a dedicated action by acquiring and using an item. Specifically, in the determination ratio of the presence / absence of items targeting relief (FIG. 13-13), the determination ratios of "not used" and "used / not acquired" may both be 0%.

(Variation example 15 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, when the item is acquired (stocked), an example of simply displaying the item immediately after the start of fluctuation or immediately after the reach has been described (for example, FIGS. 13-23 (B), 13-27 (B), 13-2.
7 (D)), the effect (item acquisition effect) may be executed when the item is acquired.
As the item acquisition effect, for example, options such as "up card x 1", "up card x 2", "up card x 1, cancellation card x 1", "... (off)" (display contents are the judgment result of item acquisition). Roulette production using roulette with (change as appropriate according to),
Destroy the wall with "Up card x 1"->"Cancel card x 1"->"Up card x 1, Cancel card x 1" etc. (Display contents are changed appropriately according to the judgment result of item acquisition) It may be a continuous button press. One of multiple types of item acquisition effects can be executed, and the degree of expectation (percentage of one or more items that can be acquired, specific items (for example, cancellation) depending on the type of item acquisition effect to be executed The rate at which the card) can be obtained)) may be different.

(Modification example 16 of the feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example in which the item acquisition (stock) timing is immediately after the start of fluctuation and immediately after the reach has been described (see, for example, FIG. 13-17 (A)), but the item may be acquired at other timings. The acquisition timing may be one place or three or more places. The acquisition timing may be different depending on the type of item. In addition, a timer may notify the remaining time until the item is used (activated).

(Modification example 17 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which one item is used for one scene (timing) has been described, but two or more items may be used for one scene. As an example, 1
Two or more items of the same type may be used for one scene.
The action (movement) caused by the use may be different depending on whether one item is used or two or more items are used. Specifically, for example, two up cards (or two cancellation cards) may be used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed. When two up cards (or two cancellation cards) are used in the scene where "weak title" is displayed, "weak title" is started at once (without going through "medium title"). It may become a "strong title". As another example, two or more items of different types may be used for one scene. Specifically, for example, an up card (1 card) and a cancel card (1 card) may be used in a scene where a "weak title" is displayed. In the scene where "weak title" is displayed, the up card (
When (1) and cancellation card (1) are used, "Weak title" is changed to "Weak title"
It may become a "strong title". When the up card and the cancel card are used as described above, a special effect may be performed. For example, when an upcard is used for a "weak title" (when the upcard image 011SHUPC is superimposed on the weak title image 011SHJT (see FIG. 13-11 (D3)), the weak title After displaying the image 011SHJTT (see FIG. 13-11 (E3)), the medium title image 011SHTT is displayed (see FIG. 13-11 (F3)), and when a cancel card is used for the "weak title" (weak). When the cancel card image 011SHXLC is superimposed on the title image 011SHJT (see FIG. 13-11 (D4)), after destroying the weak title image 011SHJT (see FIG. 13-11 (E4)), the middle Although the title image 011SHTT is displayed (see FIG. 13-11 (F4)), when the up card and the cancel card are used for the "weak title", the weak title image 011SH
When a lightning strikes JT and the lightning strikes directly, the weak title image 011SHJT shines (whites out), and when the light subsides (when recovering from the whiteout), the weak title image 011
The strong title image 011SHKT may be displayed instead of SHJT.

(Modification example 18 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which there are two types of items (up card and cancel card) has been described, but there may be three or more types of items. For example, in addition to the up card and the cancel card, the character card corresponding to the operation of the character (movable body 011SH32) is acquired.
It may be used. That is, the character card may be used and acquired by targeting the character. In addition, there are multiple timings as the operation timing of the accessory, the timing of operation (which timing among the multiple timings it operated) and the number of times it operates (how many timings of the multiple timings it operated).
Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation for a big hit (the degree of expectation for winning a battle) may be different.

(Variation example 19 of the feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example in which the item does not change to another type after being displayed (stock) has been described, but the item may change to another type after being displayed (stock). For example, an up card may be displayed immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the up card may change to a cancel card immediately after reaching. It may be suggested that the displayed (stocked) item may change to another item. For example, as the display mode of the up card, a normal mode and a special mode different from the normal mode (blinking mode, swing mode, etc.) are prepared, and when the display mode of the up card is a special mode, it is a normal mode. It may be easier to change to a cancellation card than sometimes.

(Modification example 20 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the item type (up card, cancel card) can be identified at the time when the item display starts (stock start) has been described, but even if the item type cannot be identified at the time when the item display starts. Good. For example, for some or all of the displayed cards, the type may not be identifiable at the start of display, and the type may be identifiable at any timing until it is used. For example, at the timing of the display start, the back side of the common symbol whose card type cannot be identified is displayed, and at the timing after the execution of the activation effect, the front surface where the card type can be identified (FIGS. 13-7 (A) (B). ) May be displayed. In addition to displaying the up card and cancel card on the back side, the display mode on the back side is the same as that of the up card and cancel card, although the display mode on the front side is "..." etc. The card) may be displayed on the back side. The Gase card may be erased when it becomes identifiable as a Gase card (after the surface is displayed). In addition, the fluctuation of the Gase card may end (erased at the end of the fluctuation) with the back side as it is.

(Modification example 21 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example of displaying the item (up card, cancel card) in the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 has been described, but it may be displayed in another position. For example, in the vicinity of the active display area 011SHAHA (see FIG. 13-23) (eg, active display 011SH).
It may be displayed on the upper part of AH, etc.). The display position may be different depending on the type of item and the number of acquired (stock) items.

(Modification example 22 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, an example in which the usage scene of the item (up card, cancellation card) is a pseudo continuous production, a battle rise or a relief production has been described (see FIG. 13-7 (C)), but instead of the above scene or In addition, the item may be used in other situations. That is, in the above, an example of using and acquiring an item as a target for pseudo-ream, battle completion, and relief has been described (FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16), but an item is used and acquired as a target for other events. You may do so. For example, the item may be used and acquired by targeting the change of the active display or the hold display. That is, the active display or the like may be changed by using the up card or the like. In addition, the display mode of the active display etc. is changed by directly acting the item to be used on the active display etc. (for example, performing an effect of reducing the up card etc. and displaying it on the active display etc.). Alternatively, the item to be used may be indirectly acted on the active display or the like (for example, an arrow appears by using an up card or the like, and the arrow is pierced by the active display or the like) to perform the active display. Etc. may be changed. The latter aspect (indirectly acting aspect) is
It can be said that the item is used and acquired by targeting the execution of the action effect that changes the active display and the hold display. Also, for example, the color that suggests the jackpot expectation (the color of the entire background or the periphery during the battle production, the game effect lamp 9, etc. The jackpot expectation is in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow. Items may be used and acquired by targeting changes such as high). That is, the above color change may be performed by using an up card or the like. Further, for example, an item may be used and acquired by targeting an operation (operation validity period) by an operation means (including various buttons, an operation rod, a gun, a sword, etc.).
That is, the effect including the operation by the operation means may be executed by using the up card or the like. Also, the item may be used after the end of the variable display. For example, the item may be used and acquired by targeting the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probabilistic promotion effect).

(Modification example 23 of feature unit 011SH)
Although the explanation is omitted above, the item may be used and acquired in relation to the setting value suggestion. As an example, setting values may be suggested based on the frequency of item use and acquisition. For example, depending on the set value (for example, depending on whether the set value is "1" or the set value "2" or more, whether the set value is "3" or less or the set value "4" or more. Depending on whether the set value is even or odd, etc.), the percentage of items used (eg, "used" or "used" in some or all of FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16. (No decision rate, etc.)
, Or the percentage of items displayed (stocked) (eg, FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16)
The decision ratios of "acquisition yes" and "acquisition not" in some or all of the above) may be different. As another example, the setting value may be suggested based on the result of using the item.
For example, in the above, an example in which the relief effect is always executed by using the cancel card after the defeat is notified in the battle effect (an example of winning and becoming a big hit) has been described, but after the defeat is notified in the battle effect. There are cases where the relief effect is not executed even if you use the cancel card (when the defeat remains and you are out of the game), and if the relief effect is not executed even if you use the cancel card after the defeat is notified in the battle effect, now It is also possible to suggest the set value of (for example, display an image or the like suggesting the set value). It should be noted that an item (setting suggestion card) that is used and acquired for executing the set value suggestion effect that suggests the set value may be prepared. For example, when an eye-catching image (an eye-catching image in a normal display mode common to all set values) is displayed (when it is definitely notified that the super reach has been lost), the setting suggestion card is displayed. Is activated (used), and the display mode of the eye-catching image being displayed (normal display mode common to the set values) may be changed to a special display mode (suggestion display mode suggesting the set value).

(Modification example 24 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the example in which the item is a card (up card, cancellation card) has been described, but the item does not have to be a card. For example, a medal (for example, a medal that can identify each of a plurality of types) may be displayed and acquired as an item, or a gacha (for example, a gacha that can identify which of a plurality of types of contents is contained). May be displayed.

(Modification example 25 of feature portion 011SH)
In the above, the item and the like are determined in the variable display start setting process (step S171) (see FIGS. 9, 13-21 and 13-22), but the item is determined in the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). Etc. may be decided. When determining an item or the like in the lookahead notice setting process (step S161), instead of the fluctuation pattern,
A symbol specification command (an effect control command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and a judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden probability)) or a variation category specification command (category (type) of the determined variation pattern) ) May be determined based on the content of the effect control command). It should be noted that a plurality of items may be collectively determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of one start winning, or one item may be determined in the look-ahead notice setting process at the time of each start winning. That is, a plurality of items may be associated with one variation, or one item may be associated with each variation.

(Application to other devices)
Although the example of applying to a pachinko gaming machine has been described above, it can also be applied to a slot machine. In one state (for example, a non-advantageous state), for example, periodically (for each fixed number of games, for each number of games within a predetermined range), another state (for example, an advantageous state, for example, a bonus game, AT, ART). , RT, etc.) may be proved as an enemy in a slot machine that draws a lottery.

(011SH slot machine)
For example, it is possible to execute multiple types of specific effects that suggest that they are controlled in an advantageous state.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect before the specific effect is executed, and the plurality of types of specific effects are performed at predetermined timings (for example, each within a fixed number of games). The first specific effect (for example, experience value acquisition effect that can acquire experience value, etc.) that can be executed in each game before the final battle is selected in the game. Any final battle with a different winning rate It is selected according to the experience value. The more experience value, the easier it is to select an advantageous final battle)
And a second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing (for example, one or more games in which the final battle is selected) (the final battle once selected can be changed to a more advantageous final battle). Multiple types of suggestive productions, including upstart production) and a third specific production (relief production that leads to victory from defeat) that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing (for example, the final game of the final battle) Includes a first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and a second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) that is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than the first suggestion effect. , When the first suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect, and the timing of the first suggestion effect after the predetermined timing. When the second suggestion effect is continuously executed up to, the second specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect, and when the second suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect is set. In connection with this, when the first specific effect can be executed and the second suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing,
When the third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect and the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed at a predetermined timing, at least related to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing. The first pattern (for example, each game within a fixed number of games) in which the first specific effect is executed and the second specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. If up cards and cancellation cards are stocked in each game before the final battle is selected, the up cards are used to execute the experience value acquisition effect in each game, and the game is canceled in the game in which the final battle is selected. (Pattern to execute the upstart effect using the card) and the first specific effect related to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and related to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. In the second pattern of executing the third specific effect (for example, if up cards and cancellation cards are stocked in each game within a fixed number of games and before the final battle is selected, in each game, the game concerned A pattern in which an up card is used to perform an experience value acquisition effect, and in the final game of the final battle, a cancel card is used to perform a relief effect).
The specific effect can be executed with, and the timing at which the third specific effect (relief effect) is executed may be a timing after the timing at which the second specific effect (rise effect) is executed. In addition, for the battle production of pachinko machine 1, "weak battle", "medium battle", and "medium battle" with different reliability,
There are multiple types such as "strong battle" (see Fig. 13-1, Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-4).
It is assumed that there are a plurality of types having different reliability in the final decisive battle in the above slot machine, and the second specific effect is an effect that leads to a more reliable final decisive battle. If you win the final battle, you will be controlled to your advantage.

(012SH slot machine)
For example, it is possible to execute multiple types of specific effects that suggest that they are controlled in an advantageous state.
It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect before the specific effect is executed, and the multiple types of specific effects are defeated in the first specific effect (for example, in the final battle). Relief production that leads to victory from Relief, etc.) and 2nd specific production (once selected final battle can be changed to a more advantageous final battle), which is controlled in a more advantageous state than the first specific production. Etc.), and when the suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card) is executed at the first timing (for example, the last game of the final battle), the first specific in relation to the suggestion effect. The effect can be executed, and the suggestion effect (for example, the effect by cancel card or up card) is executed at the second timing (for example, one or more games in which the final battle is selected) before the first timing. When this is done, the second specific effect can be executed in relation to the suggestion effect, and the second specific effect is executed once in connection with the suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card or an up card). Execute with the first pattern (pattern with one rise) and the second pattern (pattern with two rises) that is executed multiple times in connection with the suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card or up card). It is possible, and when the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern, it is the second in the first pattern.
It suffices if the expectation that the specific production is controlled is higher than when the specific production is executed (if the final battle is completed twice, it will be the final battle equivalent to the "strong battle", so the expectation Is high). There are multiple types of battle effects for pachinko machine 1, such as "weak battle", "medium battle", and "strong battle" with different reliability (Fig. 13-1, Fig. 13-3 to Fig. 13-). 4
(Refer to), it is assumed that there are a plurality of types having different reliability in the final battle in the above slot machine, and the second specific effect is an effect that leads to a more reliable final battle.
If you win the final battle, you will be controlled to your advantage.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 011SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 011SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.), and a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. It is feasible, and before the specific effect is executed, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect can be executed, and the plurality of types of the specific effect can be executed at predetermined timings. A first specific effect that can be executed (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect shown in FIGS. 13-8, 13-9, etc.) and a second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than a predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 13-10, the effect of the battle rising shown in FIGS. 13-11, etc.) and the third specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 13-1).
The plurality of types of the suggestion effects including the relief effect shown in the second magnitude and the like are the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card shown in FIG. 13-7 (A)) and the first suggestion effect. The first suggestive effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card shown in FIG. 13-7 (B)), which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the suggestive effect, is included. , The first suggestion effect (, the effect by the up card, etc.) is performed continuously until the predetermined timing.
For example, the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) can be executed in relation to the effect by an up card, and the first suggestion effect continues until a timing after a predetermined timing. When executed, it is possible to execute the second specific effect (for example, the effect of the battle) in relation to the first suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the up card) (for example, FIG. 13-7). (C), FIGS. 13-9 (G4) to 13-9 (L4), FIG. 13-
11 (B3) to 13-11 (G3), 13-14, 13-15, 13-16, 13-17, 13-22, etc.), the second suggestion effect (for example, cancellation card). When the effect (such as the effect by) is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous notice effect) is performed in connection with the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card). It is feasible, and when the second suggestion effect is continuously executed until a timing after a predetermined timing, the third suggestion effect is related to the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card). Specific effects (for example, relief effects, etc.) can be executed (for example, FIGS. 13-7 (C), 13-9 (G5) to 13-9 (L5), 13-12 (B2) to 13-12 (B2). 13-12 (G2), FIG. 13-13, FIG. 13-15, FIG. 13-16, FIG. 13-17, FIG. 1
3-22 etc.), at least when the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) are executed at a predetermined timing. The first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at the timing, and the second is performed at a timing after the predetermined timing. In the first pattern (for example, pseudo-continuous production, battle production pattern including battle completion) in which the second specific effect (for example, battle completion effect) is executed in relation to the suggestion effect (for example, effect by cancel card). , When the up card is decided by targeting the pseudo-continuous production and the cancel card is decided by targeting the battle completion (see Fig. 13-14 and Fig. 13-16).
The first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) at a predetermined timing, and the timing is higher than the predetermined timing. A second pattern (for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a relief effect) for executing the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect) in relation to the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) at a later timing. In the including battle effect pattern, when the up card is determined by targeting the pseudo continuous effect and the cancel card is determined by targeting the relief effect (patterns in FIGS. 13-13 and 13-16, etc.), the specific effect is described in. Is possible, and the timing at which the third specific effect (for example, a relief effect) is executed is a timing after the timing at which the second specific effect (for example, an effect at the beginning of a battle) is executed. Yes (Fig. 13-17, etc.).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. That is, in each of the different types of suggestion images, an individual specific effect (first specific effect, second specific effect) and a common specific effect (third specific effect) are executed, so that the suggestive image can be displayed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the game entertainment without excessively limiting.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature unit 011SH)
The gaming machine of the above means 1 executes the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect) in connection with the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second The first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice) is different from the case where the first specific effect (for example, pseudo-continuous notice effect) is executed in relation to the suggestive effect (for example, effect by a cancel card). (Direction, etc.) is executed (Fig. 13-9).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(Means 3 for Feature 011SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 and means 2, the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card) and the second suggestion effect (for example, an effect by a cancel card) are executed at a predetermined timing. In some cases and at a predetermined timing, the second suggestion effect (for example,
The ratio of whether the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) is continuously executed until the timing after the predetermined timing is different between the case where only the effect by the cancel card is executed and the case where only the effect by the cancel card is executed. (FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16). For example, before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the up card and the cancel card are stocked, and when only the cancel card is stocked, the cancel card is stocked after the pseudo-ream effect ends. The ratios shown are not the same (Figs. 13-13 to 13-16).
The decision ratios are not intentionally the same). Alternatively, the up card is difficult to determine as the target for the battle, and the cancel card is difficult to determine as the target for the pseudo-ream effect. Therefore, if the up card and the cancel card are stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect. There is a high possibility that the up card is the target of the pseudo-continuous production, and there is a high possibility that the cancellation card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-continuous production. On the other hand, if only the cancel card is stocked before the start of the pseudo-ream effect, the pseudo-ream effect occurs more frequently than the battle starts (because the pseudo-ream effect is also executed in the normal reach). It is relatively likely that the cancel card is the target of the pseudo-ream effect, and it is not likely that the cancel card is in stock at the end of the pseudo-ream effect.

According to the game machine, attention can be paid to the type of suggestive effect when the first specific effect is executed.

(Means 4 for Feature 011SH)
When the gaming machine of the above means 1 to 3 executes the first specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous notice effect), the gaming machine is related to the first suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card). The ratio to be executed and the ratio to be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card) are different (FIGS. 13-15 and 13-16).

According to the game machine, the first specific effect can be executed in connection with the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect according to the psychology of the player.

(Means 5 for Feature 011SH)
The gaming machines of means 1 to 4 can execute a notification effect (for example, an activation effect shown in FIG. 13-17) for notifying that the specific effect is executed in connection with the suggestion effect. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 (H) to 13-24 (F), in connection with the stock of upcards (that is, the stocked upcards are used). It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (in connection with), and as shown in FIGS. 13-25 (C) to 13-25 (H), the cancel card is It is possible to display the activation image 011SHHD2 informing that the battle is to be completed in relation to being stocked (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked cancel card). −28 (A) to FIG. 13-23 (G)
As shown in, the activation image 011SHHD1 notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in connection with the stock of the up card (that is, in relation to the use of the stocked up card). Can be displayed. Further, FIGS. 13-31 (F) to 13-
As shown in 32 (E), the activation to notify that the relief effect is executed in connection with the stock of the cancellation card (that is, in relation to the use of the stock cancellation card). The image 011SHHD2 can be displayed), and the notification effect can be executed even when the suggestion effect is not executed (for example, FIG. 13-30 (B).
) ~ As shown in FIG. 13-30 (G), the activation image 011SHHD even when the upcard is not stocked (that is, when the upcard is used as an emergency activation).
1 can be displayed), when the notification effect is executed when the suggestion effect is not executed, the specific effect equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value is executed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 13-15, the determination ratio of targeting the pseudo-continuous production without stocking the up card is 12% for the normal reach (missing) and 15% for the normal reach (big hit). Yes, the percentage of decisions to stock up cards and target them for pseudo-continuous production is 73% (26% + 47%) for normal reach (missing) and 70 for normal reach (big hit).
% (25% + 45%). Therefore, the reliability of the pseudo-ream effect when an unstocked upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed is the pseudo-ream when the non-stock upcard is used and the pseudo-ream effect is executed. Higher than the reliability of the production. In other words, when a non-stocked up card is used and a pseudo-ream effect is executed, the reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-ream effect is a predetermined value expected value (a pseudo-ream effect using a stocked up card). The reliability of the jackpot by the pseudo-continuous production when is executed) or more.

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. For example, a card that is not in stock may be used and a specific effect may be executed (a specific effect is executed as a surprise), and the specific effect (a specific effect generated as a surprise) is equal to or greater than a predetermined expected value. For,
It is possible to prevent a decline in interest due to lack of stock.

(Means 6 for Feature 011SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the suggestion effect can be started at a plurality of types of timings, and at which timing the execution is started according to the type of the suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the determination ratio of the display (stock) timing differs depending on the type of card. Also, it is used depending on the type of card. Timing (ie, target) decision rates are different).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the suggestion effect is executed at various timings during the game.
Expectations can be given at various timings.

(Explanation of Means Related to Feature 012SH)
(Means 1 relating to feature unit 012SH)
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, bonus game, etc.), and a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. It is feasible, and before the specific effect is executed, a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect can be executed, and the plurality of types of the specific effect are the first specific effects. An effect (for example, a relief effect shown in FIGS. 13-12, etc.) and a second specific effect (for example, FIG. 13-10, which is less expected to be controlled in the advantageous state than the first specific effect).
The first timing (for example, "LOSE image 011S") includes the effect of the battle completion shown in FIGS. 13-11 and the like, and the suggestion effect (for example, the effect by the cancel card).
The first specific effect (for example, a relief effect) can be executed in connection with the suggestion effect when it is executed in the scene where "HKH1" is displayed, and the suggestion effect (for example, up) can be executed. In connection with the suggestion effect when the effect by the card or the cancel card is executed at the second timing (for example, the scene where the title of the battle effect is displayed) before the first timing. The second specific effect (for example, the effect of starting a battle) can be executed, and the second specific effect (for example, an effect of starting a battle) can be executed.
Is executed once in connection with the suggestion effect (for example, an effect using an up card or a cancel card), the first pattern (for example, a battle is completed using stocked cards).
Patterns to be executed once, etc. (See FIG. 13-14) and the second pattern to be executed a plurality of times in connection with the suggestion effect (for example, an effect using an up card or a cancel card) (for example, the battle is completed twice using the stocked cards). Patterns, etc. (see FIGS. 13-14), and the second specific effect was executed in the first pattern when the second specific effect was executed in the second pattern. The expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than in the case (since the two battles are strong battles, the expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state is high (FIGS. 13-1, 13-3, 13). Figure 13-4).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the interest of the game can be improved. That is, when the second specific effect, which has a lower expectation than the first specific effect, is executed, the expectation is higher than when it is executed once by repeatedly executing the second specific effect, which raises the expectation of the player. Alternatively, it can be sustained and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 2 pertaining to feature 012SH)
In the game machine of the above means 1, the first pattern (for example, the effect of the battle completion) is related to the suggestion effect (for example, the effect of the up card or the cancel card). A pattern in which the stocked cards are used one by one to execute the battle once. Here, a pattern in which the two stocked cards are used to execute the battle twice, that is, the first time is also the second time. The case where the upstart is also executed in the pattern executed by using the stock) is the case where the second specific effect is executed in the second pattern in relation to the suggestion effect (for example, the stocked 1). The first specific effect (for example, a relief effect) is executed rather than a pattern or the like in which one card is used to execute the battle twice, that is, a pattern in which the second process is executed without using stock). Cheap. For example, in the case of the two rises shown in FIGS. 13-14 (C) and 13-14 (D), "when the item for which relief is targeted is acquired (FIG. 13).
In "-14 (D))", "when the item targeting relief is not acquired (Fig. 13-1)"
Rather than "4 (C))", the frequency of executing both the first and second rises using stock (that is, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 2 cards" or "used" Yes, acquisition Yes, cancellation card, immediately after reach, 2 cards are decided) is high,
The frequency of executing the second rise without using stock (that is, "used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card" or "used, acquired, canceled card,"
Immediately after reach, the rate at which "1 sheet" is determined) is low. Therefore, when both the first rise and the second rise are executed using the stock, the relief effect is more likely to be executed than when the second rise is executed without using the stock. In addition, FIG. 13-14 (
As shown in A) and FIG. 13-14 (B), even in the case of one rise, the case where the rise is executed using the stock is more than the case where the rise is executed without using the stock. It is easy to carry out relief effects. In other words, if the rise is executed without using the stock, it becomes difficult to execute the relief effect.

According to the game machine, when the first pattern having a low expectation is executed, the ratio of the first specific effect being executed is high, so that the expectation can be maintained.

(Means 3 for Feature 012SH)
In the game machines of means 1 and means 2, the suggestion effect (for example, an effect by an up card or a cancel card) is higher than the second timing (for example, a scene where the title of the battle effect is displayed). With the previous third timing (for example, the scene immediately after reach),
Execution can be started at the 4th timing (for example, the scene immediately after the start of fluctuation) before the 3rd timing (up card and cancel card are the scene immediately after the start of fluctuation, the scene immediately after reach, etc.). Can be displayed (stocked) in), and at which timing of the third timing (for example, a scene immediately after reach) or the fourth timing (for example, a scene immediately after the start of fluctuation) the execution is started. The ratio of which of the first pattern and the second pattern the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) is executed differs depending on the pattern (for example, FIG. 13-14). reference).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to pay attention to the timing at which the execution of the suggestion effect is started.

(Means 4 for Feature 012SH)
In the gaming machines of means 1 to 3 described above, the second specific effect (for example, the effect of completing a battle) is the first of other advance notice effects being executed when the second specific effect is being executed. It is an effect of changing from an aspect to a second aspect having a higher degree of expectation than the first aspect (see, for example, FIG. 13-11).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 5 for Feature 012SH)
In the gaming machines of the means 1 to the means 4, the second specific effect after the first time executed in the second pattern is executed without being related to the suggestion effect. For example, FIG. 13-14
(C), in the two battles shown in Fig. 13-14 (D), "Used, acquired, canceled card, immediately after the start of fluctuation, 1 card", "used, acquired, canceled card, reach" Immediately after, if "one card" is decided, one cancellation card is used and the upstart is executed twice. Specifically, the cancellation card stocked at the time of the first rise is consumed. Therefore, at the time of the second rise, it is executed without consuming the stocked cancellation card (that is, regardless of the stock of the cancel card).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, it is possible to improve the interest. In other words, since the card is used without stock, the feeling of surprise is outstanding and the interest can be improved.

(Means 6 for Feature 012SH)
In the game machines of the above means 1 to 5, the suggestion effect can be started at a plurality of types of timings, and at which timing the execution is started according to the type of the suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 13-13 to 13-16, the determination ratio of the display (stock) timing differs depending on the type of card. Also, it is used depending on the type of card. Timing (ie, target) decision rates are different).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the suggestion effect is executed at various timings during the game.
Expectations can be given at various timings.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
It is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects related to the execution of the specific effect before the specific effect is executed.
Multiple types of the specific effects
The first specific effect that can be executed at a predetermined timing,
A second specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing,
Including the third specific effect that can be executed at a timing later than the predetermined timing,
Multiple types of the above-mentioned suggestive effects
The first suggestion production and
Including the second suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestion effect.
When the first suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect, and the first suggestion effect is later than the predetermined timing. The second specific effect can be executed in relation to the first suggestion effect when it is continuously executed until the timing of.
When the second suggestion effect is continuously executed up to a predetermined timing, the first specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is later than the predetermined timing. When the third specific effect is continuously executed up to the timing of, the third specific effect can be executed in relation to the second suggestion effect.
When the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are executed at a predetermined timing, at least,
A first pattern in which the first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and the second specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. When,
A second pattern in which the first specific effect is executed in relation to the first suggestion effect at a predetermined timing, and the third specific effect is executed in relation to the second suggestion effect at a timing later than the predetermined timing. And, the specific effect can be executed with
When executing the first specific effect, the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the first suggestion effect and the ratio of executing the first specific effect in relation to the second suggestion effect. Is different,
A game machine characterized by that.

Images